Compaq Tru64 UNIX Installation guide

Add to my manuals
180 Pages

advertisement

Compaq Tru64 UNIX Installation guide | Manualzz

33333333333333333

Release Notes for Version 4.0F

Order Number: AA-QTLMF-TE

April 1999

Product Version: Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F

This book contains notes on software and documentation restrictions for

Compaq Tru64

UNIX

(formerly DIGITAL UNIX) Version 4.0F and the bundled layered products that ship with the operating system.

This book also describes significant new and changed features in this version of the Tru64 UNIX operating system and lists features and interfaces scheduled for retirement in future releases.

Compaq maintains an online Technical Update that contains information about restrictions and problems that have been discovered since Version

4.0F began shipping. To view this document on the Web, go to the following URL: http://www.unix.digital.com/faqs/publications

/updates/V40F/TITLE.HTM

Compaq recommends that you visit this site periodically to see if any 33333333333333333

Compaq Computer Corporation

Houston, Texas

Compaq Computer Corporation makes no representations that the use of its products in the manner described in this publication will not infringe on existing or future patent rights, nor do the descriptions contained in this publication imply the granting of licenses to make, use, or sell equipment or software in accordance with the description.

Possession, use, or copying of the software described in this publication is authorized only pursuant to a valid written license from Compaq or an authorized sublicensor.

Digital Equipment Corporation 1999

All rights reserved.

COMPAQ, the Compaq logo, and the Digital logo are registered in the U.S. Patent and

Trademark Office. The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

ALL–IN–1, Alpha AXP, AlphaGeneration, AlphaServer, AlphaStation, AXP, Bookreader,

CDA, DDIS, DEC, DEC Ada, DEC Fortran, DEC FUSE, DECnet, DECstation, DECsystem,

DECterm, DECUS, DECwindows, DTIF, MASSBUS, MicroVAX, OpenVMS,

POLYCENTER, Q–bus, StorageWorks, Tru64, TruCluster, TURBOchannel, ULTRIX,

ULTRIX Mail Connection, ULTRIX Worksystem Software, UNIBUS, VAX, VAXstation,

VMS, and XUI.

Java and Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun

Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Netscape Navigator is a trademark of

Netscape Communications Corporation. NFS is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems,

Inc. ONC is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Oracle is a registered trademark of

Oracle Corporation. Open Software Foundation, OSF, OSF/1, OSF/Motif, and Motif are trademarks of the Open Software Foundation, Inc. Adobe, PostScript, and Display PostScript are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. Proteon is a trademark of Proteon

Associates, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark and The Open Group is a trademark of The

Open Group in the US and other countries. X/Open is a trademark of X/Open Company Ltd.

Xerox is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

Other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective companies.

About This Manual

Audience

Organization

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Related Documents

Reader’s Comments

Conventions

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

xv xv xv xvii xviii

1 New and Changed Features

1.1

New Hardware Support .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1.2

Support for Fibre Channel Based Storage

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1.3

Logical Partitions for AlphaServer GS140 System

1.4

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1.5

ATM PACING VC Bandwidth Accounting Change

1.6

Extensions to atom’s Programmable Interfaces .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1.7

Ability to Examine the Stack of a User Program that Caused a Kernel

Crash Dump .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1.8

Compaq Analyze Utility

1.9

Secure Version of syslog

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1.12

Bootable Tape Enhancements

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1.10

Changes to VFS and AdvFS Tunable Attributes

1.11

Visual Threads .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1–4

1–4

1–4

1–5

1–6

1–6

1–2

1–2

1–3

1–3

1–3

1–4

1.13

Compaq Advanced Printing Software

1.14

Netscape Communicator Version 4.5

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1.15

Compaq Insight Manager .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1.16

Support for Universal Serial Bus Keyboards and Mice

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1.17

AltaVista Search on Documentation CD-ROM

1.18

Support for Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1.19

Availability of COM for Tru64 UNIX .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1–6

1–7

1–7

1–7

1–8

1–8

1–8

2 Installation Notes

2.1

Update Installation .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

2.1.1

Recovering from Boot Problems After Update Installation .

.

.

2.2

Installation Problems Using Console Device EWE0

2.3

Join Database Migration .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

2–1

2–1

2–2

2–2

3 Processor-Specific Notes

3.1

General Notes on Processors .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.1.1

Upgrading Your Hardware .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.1.2

PCI-Based Systems with ATI Mach64 Graphics Controllers .

.

3.1.3

PCI Shared Interrupt Support .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.1.4

KZPSA Behind the PCI-to-PCI Bridge

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.1.5

Qlogic ISP1040B CAM Errors .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.1.6

DJ-ML200-xx PCI NVRAM Hardware Rev Must Be E01

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.1.7

RIS boot Options .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.2

Personal Workstation 433au, 500au, and 600au Systems .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.2.1

EIDE (ATAPI) CD–ROM Support

3.2.2

64-Bit PCI Option Cards .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.2.3

Incorrect Default Keyboard Mappings .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.3

AlphaServer 1000 and 1000A Systems .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.3.1

EISA Configuration Utility Diskette Version 1.10

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3–3

3–3

3–4

3–4

3–4

3–4

3–1

3–1

3–2

3–2

3–2

3–2

3–3

3–3

iv Contents

3.3.2

Graphics Resolution .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.4

AlphaServer 8200, 8400, GS60 and GS140 Systems

3.4.1

Minimum Firmware Requirements .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.5

Alpha VME 4/224, 4/288, and 5/nnn Single-Board Computers .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.5.1

Verify CPU Version .

3.5.2

Firmware Requirements

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.5.3

Restrictions and Known Problems .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.5.3.1

Byte Addressability Not Supported by mmap (5/nnn

Only) .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.5.3.2

VME Autovectors .

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.5.3.3

Network Port Termination

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.5.4

Writing VMEbus Device Drivers .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.5.5

CPU Boards Cannot Be Installed Until Operating System Is

.

.

.

.

.

Installed .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.5.6

Futurebus Backplane Is Not Supported

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.6

DMCC EBM2n and EBM4n Class Single Board Computers .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.6.1

Verify CPU Version .

3.6.2

Firmware Requirements

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.6.3

Restrictions and Known Problems .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.6.3.1

Option Card Restrictions .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.6.3.2

PBXGB-AA (TGA2 PowerStorm 3D30) Video Card

.

.

.

.

.

Restrictions .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.6.3.3

General Restrictions

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.6.4

Hardware Configuration for DMCC Eight-Headed Graphics

Systems .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.6.4.1

Hardware and Software Requirements

3.6.4.2

Hardware Setup .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.6.4.3

Software Setup .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.7

AXPvme Single Board Computers .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.7.1

Firmware Upgrade Required .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.7.2

Unpredictable Results When Performing Master Block

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Transfers .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3–11

3–11

3–12

3–13

3–14

3–14

3–14

3–8

3–8

3–9

3–9

3–9

3–10

3–11

3–7

3–7

3–7

3–8

3–8

3–8

3–5

3–5

3–5

3–6

3–6

3–6

3–7

Contents v

3.8

DEC 7000 System .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.8.1

Misleading Error Message Displayed During Installation

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3.9

AlphaPC 164 Systems .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3–14

3–15

3–15

4 Base System Software Notes

4.1

Commands and Utilities .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.1

Escaped Comment Symbols in a Makefile

4.1.2

Security .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.2.1

Unexpected Command Behavior with ACLs

4.1.2.2

ACLs and Archive Tools .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.3

Emacs Can Lose ACL File Settings .

.

.

.

4.1.4

Some Emacs Command Line Options Fail

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.5

New Tunable Parameter for Running Oracle8

4.1.6

Change to Format of ipcs Command .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.7

Sendmail .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.7.1

New sendmail Version 8.8.8

4.1.7.2

Initial sendmail Configuration

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.7.3

Warning Message When sendmail Updates the alias

Database .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.7.4

Mail to user@localhost Fails .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.8

The tar Command h Option Does Not Work As Documented .

4.1.9

Netscape Communicator .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.9.1

Netscape Communicator Dumps Core Running in

CDE .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.9.2

Netscape Communicator Core Dumps If mailto: Link

Is Selected In a Web Page .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.9.3

Deleting Multiple Mail Messages Causes Netscape

Communicator to Core Dump .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.9.4

Netscape Communicator Dumps Core Intermittently .

4.1.9.5

Cannot Delete Mail Messages From Inbox to Trash

When Using IMAP Server .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.9.6

Communicator Returns sh: /usr/bin/X11/showps: not

.

.

.

.

.

found .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.9.7

Installing Open3D Causes Netscape Communicator to

.

.

Core Dump .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–6

4–7

4–8

4–5

4–6

4–6

4–6

4–1

4–1

4–1

4–1

4–2

4–2

4–3

4–3

4–3

4–3

4–3

4–4

4–4

4–5

4–5

4–5

vi Contents

4.1.9.8

Netscape Communicator Version 4.5 Form Handling

Problem in Asian Locales .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.1.10

Do Not Use Current Directory Character with setld .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.2

SysMan System Management Graphical User Interface

4.2.1

Account Manager .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.2.1.1

Copying Accounts and UID

4.2.1.2

Account Manager Restrictions

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.2.1.3

Account Manager Problems .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.2.1.4

Enhanced Security Account Manager Problems

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.2.2

BIND Configuration .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.2.3

The dxshutdown Application Does Not Prohibit Logins

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.3

System Administration .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.3.1

License Management Facility Allows Year 2000 Testing

4.3.2

EISA Configuration Utility Revision Requirements .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.3.3

Open3D Support .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.3.4

Opening a Write-Protected Tape in Write Mode

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.3.5

Restrictions for a Dataless Environment .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.3.6

Alternate Root Installation May Change Host File Dates

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.3.7

Enhanced Security .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.3.7.1

4.3.7.2

Distribution of Enhanced Security Profiles via NIS

Disaster Recovery .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–17

4–18

4.3.7.3

The pw_id_map and gr_id_map Files Are Obsolete .

.

4–18

4.3.7.4

Behavior of useradd, usermod, and userdel Commands .

4–19

4.3.8

Enabling Extended UIDs in the Kernel

4.3.9

Insight Manager Agents .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–19

4–20

4.3.9.1

Installation .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–20

4.3.9.2

Starting and Stopping the Insight Manager Daemons .

4–20

4.3.9.3

How to Monitor the Tru64 UNIX Managed System .

.

4.3.9.4

Browser Requirements and Security

4.3.9.5

Security Access

4.3.9.6

Known Problems

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–20

4–22

4–23

4–24

4–24 4.3.10

Startup Messages Lost in Large Configurations .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.3.11

Incoming Remote Print Jobs Disable Queue If They Create

.

.

.

.

.

spooldir Lock File .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–25

4–14

4–14

4–15

4–15

4–15

4–15

4–16

4–17

4–8

4–8

4–8

4–8

4–9

4–9

4–10

4–10

4–13

4–13

Contents vii

4.3.12

The lpstat Command Fails .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–26

4.3.13

The Alias Name Field Is Empty in the Disk Configuration .

4–26

4.3.14

Problems when Trying to Mount DVD–ROM .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–26

4.4

Network and Communications .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–27

4.4.1

IP Switching over ATM .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.4.2

Changes to ATM syslog Messages

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.4.3

Edit the /etc/hosts File After Running netsetup

4.4.4

CDE’s Static Dependency on the Network .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.4.5

Support for NetRAIN Network Interface

4.4.6

NetRAIN Interface Configuration Change

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.4.7

Network Services Fail to Start with NetRAIN Interface

4.4.8

LAT and NetRAIN .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.4.9

NetRAIN and Microsoft Windows NT Clients .

.

.

.

.

4.4.10

Sender Address Problem When Using DECnet Mail

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–31

4–32

4.4.11

DHCP Database Migration (joind and bootpd) .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–32

4.4.12

TCP Timestamp and Selective Acknowledgement Support .

4–33

4.4.13

Latent Support for Multiple Network Adapters in a Subnet .

4–33

4–27

4–27

4–28

4–28

4–29

4–30

4–30

4–31

4.5

Local Area Transport .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–34

4.5.1

Duplicate Minor Numbers and latsetup .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–34

4.5.2

CTRL/A Causes LAT tty to Change the Case of Characters .

4–34

4.5.3

Simultaneous llogin Connections

4.5.4

LAT Interactions with NetRAIN .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–34

4–34

4.6

File Systems .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.6.1

The newfs Command No Longer Searches disktab File

4.6.2

Using ACLs over NFS .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.6.3

ACL Size Limitations .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.6.4

Advanced File System (AdvFS)

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–34

4–35

4–35

4–35

4–36

4.6.4.1

AdvFS and fsync() .

.

.

.

.

4.6.4.2

Reusing AdvFS Partitions

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.6.4.3

Disk Usage Information .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.6.4.4

Cleanly Unmount File Systems Before Changing

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–36

4–36

4–36

Operating System Versions .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.6.4.5

Running Verify on AdvFS File Systems

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.6.4.6

The vdump Utility Requires Two kill Signals

4.6.4.7

Verify Fails on Dual-Mounted Domain .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–37

4–37

4–37

4–38

4.6.4.8

Very Small AdvFS Domains Created In lockmode 4 .

4–38

viii Contents

4.6.5

Logical Storage Manager .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.6.6

Mounting Associated Products CD-ROMs on Tru64 UNIX

Versions Other Than Version 4.0F

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–38

4.6.5.1

LSM Sparse Plexes May Erroneously Mask an I/O

Failure .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.6.5.2

Restrictions with LSM root and swap Volumes .

.

4.6.5.3

Possible Problems Accessing Physical Block 0 with

.

.

.

.

.

.

LSM .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.6.5.4

Using LSM with SWXCR-P(A/B) and SWXCR-

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

E(A/B) RAID Controllers .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4.6.5.5

Enabling LSM After Installation Requires Rebuilding

.

.

.

.

4–38

4–38

4–39

4–39 the Kernel .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–39

4.6.5.6

The volrootmir Script Supports Only LUN 0 on HSZ .

4–40

4.6.5.7

Using LSM rootvol Requires sysconfigtab Parameters .

4–40

4.6.5.8

Error While Dissociating a Preferred LSM Plex .

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–40

4.6.5.9

Presto Reset and Flush Operations May Cause System

Crash .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

4–40

4–41

5 Development Environment Notes

5.1

General Programming .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.1.1

The malloc Function Is Now Tunable for Better

Multithreaded Performance .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.1.2

New DEC C Default Tuning Could Impact Applications That

Directly Map I/O Space .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.2

Realtime Programming .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.2.1

SA_SIGINFO Not Visible Under Certain Namespace

Conditions .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.2.2

POSIX 1003.1b Synchronized I/O and File Truncation

5.2.3

The fcntl() Function and F_GETFL with O_DSYNC File

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Status .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.3

DECthreads (pthreads) .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.3.1

5.3.2

Static Libraries

Signal Handling

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.3.3

Scheduling Behavior (Contention Scope) .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5–1

5–1

5–2

5–2

5–2

5–3

5–3

5–3

5–3

5–3

5–4

Contents ix

5.3.4

Problems Using of the stackaddr Thread Creation Attribute .

.

5.3.5

DECthreads Read-Write Locks

5.3.6

DECthreads Object Naming

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.3.7

DECthreads Metering Capability May Not Be Reliable in

Some Situations .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.3.8

Memory Alignment Issue .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.3.9

DECthreads pthread_debug() and pthread_debug_cmd()

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Routines .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.3.10

DECthreads SIGEV_THREAD Notification Mechanism

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.4

Profiling .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.4.1

Change to hiprof’s Profiling of Threaded Programs

5.4.2

Change in Naming of Files by cc Profiling Option .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.5

Debugging with dbx .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.5.1

Examining the User Program Stack in a Kernel Crash Dump .

5.6

Java Programming .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5.6.1

Name Space Conflict Between Java and SVE

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

5–8

5–8

5–10

5–10

5–4

5–5

5–5

5–6

5–6

5–7

5–7

5–7

5–8

5–8

6 Window System Software Notes

6.1

Hardware Notes and Restrictions .

.

.

.

6.1.1

Qvision Graphics Display Error

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.2

X Servers .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.2.1

Limited Multiscreen Display Support with CDE

6.2.2

Do Not Modify the keymaps.dir File .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.3

X Clients .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.3.1

X Window Colormap Resources

6.3.2

Old X Environment .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.4

CDE Clients .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.4.1

Inaccessible Dialog Buttons .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.4.2

Screen Savers Prevent Efficient Power Management

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6–2

6–2

6–3

6–3

6–3

6–3

6–1

6–1

6–1

6–1

6–2

x Contents

6.4.3

Remote Invocation of CDE File Manager dtfile

6.4.4

The dtmail Application .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.4.4.1

MAILLOCKING Environment Variable

6.4.4.2

Tooltalk Locking Disabled by Default .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.4.4.3

Row and Column Display .

6.4.4.4

Attachments Are Not Included

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.4.5

CDE’s Static Dependency on the Network .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.4.6

The xnlLanguage Resource Settings May Cause Problems

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

with CDE .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.4.7

Possible Failure in the XOpenDisplay Call

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.5

Windows Programming

6.5.1

X11 Font Problem

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.6

Internationalization .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.6.1

Japanese Keyboard Support in Console Mode .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6.6.2

System-Default Keyboard Setting May Prevent User Login .

.

.

6.6.3

Dxterm Does Not Support Latin-2, Latin-4, and Latin-Cyrillic

Characters .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

6–6

6–6

6–6

6–7

6–4

6–4

6–4

6–4

6–5

6–5

6–6

6–7

6–7

6–7

6–8

7 Documentation Notes

7.1

Installation Guide .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.1.1

Chapter 12 (Performing a Worldwide Update Installation)

7.1.2

Appendix E (Associated Product Descriptions) .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.2

System Administration Guide .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.2.1

Section 10.5.2.1 (Print Symbols for Advanced Printing

Software) .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.2.2

Section E.4.1 (Hardware Requirements) .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.2.3

Section E.4.3.3 (Configuring Logical Partitions)

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.2.4

Section E.4.3.7 (Disabling Automatic Boot Reset)

7.2.5

Section E.4.3.8 (Set Memory Interleave Mode)

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.2.6

Section E.4.4 (Initializing Partitions) .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.2.7

Section E.4.5 (Installing the Operating System)

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.3

Assembly Language Programmer’s Guide .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7–1

7–1

7–1

7–2

7–2

7–2

7–3

7–3

7–3

7–3

7–4

7–4

Contents xi

7.4

Programming with ONC RPC .

.

7.5

Gate Daemon Configuration Guide

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.6

System Configuration and Tuning Guide

7.7

Guide to Preparing Product Kits .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.7.1

Section A.1.12 (How to Build a Consolidated CD–ROM)

7.7.2

Section A.2.2 (Building a Consolidated CD–ROM) .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.8

Online Help Volumes .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.8.1

General Problems

7.8.2

Integration .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.8.3

Update Path in Installation Online Help Is Incorrect

7.8.4

Help Volumes by Application .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7.9

Device Driver Documentation .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

7–6

7–6

7–7

7–7

7–7

7–9

7–4

7–5

7–5

7–5

7–6

7–6

8 Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

8.1

DECwindows Applications .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.2

Adobe Display PostScript, Client Libraries, and X Server Extension .

8.3

Nonconforming Curses Library

8.4

The -oldc C Compiler .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.5

The dbx Debugger .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.6

DEC C Compiler Default Change from -std0 to -std

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.7

Change in struct utmp, struct utmpx, and struct lastlog

8.8

C Language long double Type Changing to 128 Bits

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.9

C Library Functions and POSIX P1003.1C

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.10

POSIX 1003.4a (draft 4) pthread Routines in DECthreads

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.11

DECthreads CMA Interface .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.12

Asynchronous I/O Binary Compatibility

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.13

Nemacs .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.14

Berkeley Software Distribution TTY-NAME

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8–5

8–6

8–6

8–6

8–7

8–7

8–4

8–4

8–4

8–5

8–1

8–2

8–3

8–4

xii Contents

8.15

SCSI Device Names .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.16

The -x and -p Options in addvol and mkfdmn

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.17

LSM Block Change Logging (BCL)

8.18

LSM volassist Command Syntax

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.19

LSM volprint Command Format

8.20

LVM-to-LSM Migration Tool

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.21

OSF/Motif Version 1.1.3

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.22

XIE Version 3.0 X Client Extension

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.23

Microsoft Sound Board Driver

8.24

Graph Utility .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.25

The atmsetup Script .

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.26

Remote Prestoserve Support

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.27

Disk Size Requirement for Installation

8.28

Installupdate -i Option .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.29

Different awk Versions

8.30

The secsetup Script .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.31

Open3D TURBOchannel and PVpci Device Support

8.32

System Management Utilities .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.33

Changed Protected Password Database Format

8.34

Audit_setup Script .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.35

VM Subsystem ubc_nfsloopback Variable Is Obsolete

8.36

libsecurity.a

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.37

XPG3 ctab Locales

8.38

Security Interfaces .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.39

The ogated Routing Daemon

8.40

PEX Extensions .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8.41

NL* and NL* libc Interfaces

8.42

DEC Ada RTL .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8–12

8–13

8–14

8–14

8–14

8–14

8–15

8–15

8–16

8–16

8–16

8–16

8–10

8–11

8–11

8–11

8–11

8–11

8–12

8–12

8–9

8–9

8–10

8–10

8–7

8–7

8–7

8–8

Contents xiii

8.43

System V Environment .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8–16

A System Limits

A.1

System Limits .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

A.1.1

Installation Requirements

A.1.2

Memory Limits .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

A.1.3

Process Limits .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

A.1.4

Device Addressing Limits

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

A.1.5

Device Limits .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

A.1.6

Logical Storage Manager Limits

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

A.1.7

A.1.8

File System Limits

Networking Limits

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

A.1.9

Limits for Backup Utilities .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

A–1

A–1

A–1

A–2

A–3

A–4

A–4

A–5

A–7

A–8

B Software Subset Information

B.1

Disk Space Required for Software Subsets

B.2

Disk Space Required for Update Installations

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

B.3

Disk Space Required for RIS Areas .

.

B.4

Disk Space Required for Documentation

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

B–1

B–17

B–17

B–19

Index

Tables

3-1: Supported Options Behind the Bridge

8-1: Retired DECwindows Applications

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8-2: BCL Configuration Examples .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8-3: libsecurity Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

8-4: libsecurity Data Structure Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

B-1: Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F Operating System, Volume 1 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

B-2: Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F Associated Products, Volume 1 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

3–10

8–1

8–8

8–15

8–15

B–1

B–4

xiv Contents

B-3: Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F Associated Products, Volume 2

B-4: Disk Space Required for RIS Areas .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

B–14

B–18

Contents xv

This manual contains release notes for Compaq Tru64

UNIX

(formerly

DIGITAL UNIX) Version 4.0F.

This manual also describes significant new and changed features in this version of the Tru64 UNIX operating system and lists features and interfaces scheduled for retirement in future releases.

Audience

These release notes are for the person who installs the product and for anyone using the product following installation.

Organization

This manual is organized as follows:

Chapter 1 Contains an overview of new and changed features.

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Contains notes pertaining to installation.

Contains processor-specific information.

Contains information about the base operating system software.

Contains information about the development environment.

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Contains information about the window system software.

Contains information about the documentation.

Chapter 8 Contains information about features scheduled for removal in future versions of Tru64 UNIX.

Appendix A Contains information about the system limits.

Appendix B Contains information about the software subsets for the Tru64 UNIX software kit.

Related Documents

In addition to this manual, you should have the following documentation available during the installation of this release.

• The hardware documentation for your system

• The online or hardcopy reference pages

• The HTML book files that are provided on the CD–ROM

Read This First letter

This letter provides general information pertaining to the Tru64 UNIX

Version 4.0F software.

• Console Firmware Release Notes

This document includes the console firmware revision numbers and release notes.

• Installation Guide

This document describes in detail how to install Tru64 UNIX.

• Sharing Software on a Local Area Network

This document describes in detail how to set up and manage a Remote

Installation Services (RIS) area for Tru64 UNIX systems. It also contains information on setting up Dataless Management Services (DMS).

• System Administration

This document contains information on administering and maintaining your system.

The printed version of the Tru64 UNIX documentation set is color coded to help specific audiences quickly find the books that meet their needs. (You can order the printed documentation from Compaq.) This color coding is reinforced with the use of an icon on the spines of books. The following list describes this convention:

22222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Icon Color Code

General users

System and network administrators

Programmers

Reference page users

G

R

D

S

P

Blue

Red

Purple

Green

Orange

Some books in the documentation set help meet the needs of several audiences. For example, the information in some system books is also used by programmers. Keep this in mind when searching for information on specific topics.

The Documentation Overview provides information on all of the books in the

Tru64 UNIX documentation set.

xvi About This Manual

Reader’s Comments

Compaq welcomes any comments and suggestions you have on this and other

Tru64 UNIX manuals.

You can send your comments in the following ways:

• Fax: 603-884-0120 Attn: UEG Publications, ZK03-3/Y32

• Internet electronic mail: [email protected]

A Reader’s Comment form is located on your system in the following location:

/usr/doc/readers_comment.txt

• Mail:

Compaq Computer Corporation

UEG Publications Manager

ZK03-3/Y32

110 Spit Brook Road

Nashua, NH 03062-9987

A Reader’s Comment form is located in the back of each printed manual.

The form is postage paid if you mail it in the United States.

Please include the following information along with your comments:

• The full title of the book and the order number. (The order number is printed on the title page of this book and on its back cover.)

• The section numbers and page numbers of the information on which you are commenting.

• The version of Tru64 UNIX that you are using.

• If known, the type of processor that is running the Tru64 UNIX software.

The Tru64 UNIX Publications group cannot respond to system problems or technical support inquiries. Please address technical questions to your local system vendor or to the appropriate Compaq technical support office.

Information provided with the software media explains how to send problem reports to Compaq.

About This Manual xvii

Conventions

The following conventions are used in this guide:

%

$

#

% cat file

[ | ]

{ | }

. . .

cat (1)

Ctrl/x

A percent sign represents the C shell system prompt. A dollar sign represents the system prompt for the Bourne and Korn shells.

A number sign represents the superuser prompt.

Boldface type in interactive examples indicates typed user input.

Italic (slanted) type indicates variable values, placeholders, and function argument names.

In syntax definitions, brackets indicate items that are optional and braces indicate items that are required. Vertical bars separating items inside brackets or braces indicate that you choose one item from among those listed.

In syntax definitions, a horizontal ellipsis indicates that the preceding item can be repeated one or more times.

A cross-reference to a reference page includes the appropriate section number in parentheses. For example, cat (1) indicates that you can find information on the cat command in Section 1 of the reference pages.

This symbol indicates that you hold down the first named key while pressing the key or mouse button that follows the slash. In examples, this key combination is enclosed in a box (for example,

777777 ).

xviii About This Manual

New and Changed Features

The Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F software replaces earlier versions of the operating system software and provides new or additional support for the following:

• Maintenance for previous versions of the operating system

• Hardware-related support, including the following:

– Support for new AlphaServer processors

– Support for Fibre Channel based storage

– Logical partitions for AlphaServer GS140 system

• New and enhanced features, including the following:

– Upgraded Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

– Change to ATM PACING Virtual Circuits bandwidth accounting

– Extensions to the atom command’s programmable interfaces

– Ability to examine the stack of a user program that caused a kernel crash dump

– Introduction of a new Compaq Analyze utility

– Secure version of the syslog facility

– Changes to VFS and AdvFS tunable attributes

– Addition of Visual Threads

– Enhancement to the bootable tape facility

– Introduction of Compaq Advanced Printing Software Version 1.0

– A new version of Netscape Communicator

– Introduction of Compaq Insight Manager

– Support for Universal Serial Bus (USB) keyboards and mice

– AltaVista search capability on documentation CD-ROM

– Support for Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)

– Availability of COM for Tru64 UNIX

For more information about some of these features, see the following sections. You should also refer to Chapter 8, which describes features and

interfaces scheduled to be retired in future versions of the operating system.

The following sections provide more information on the major new features included in Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F.

1.1 New Hardware Support

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F adds support for the following systems:

• Compaq AlphaServer DS20

• Compaq AlphaServer ES40

1.2 Support for Fibre Channel Based Storage

Tru64 UNIX now contains support for Fibre Channel (FC) based storage.

Initially, device support is limited to the KGPSA adapters and HSG80 disk arrays interconnected via FC switches. The FC devices appear to the system as normal SCSI devices. As such, Fibre Channel configurations are bounded by the SCSI-2 namespace exported via the standard SCSI disk (rz) and tape

(tz) drivers. Many of the configuration restrictions will be removed in a future release.

As the Fibre Channel address space is much larger and more sparselypopulated than parallel SCSI, a persistent translation of SCSI target IDs to

FC addresses is necessitated in the device driver for the FC adapter. Refer to the emx (7) and emx_data.c

(4) reference pages for further information on how this is performed.

For the Version 4.0F release, support for Fibre Channel storage is limited to data devices only. A Fibre Channel disk device cannot be used for boot, swap, or dump. Support for these features will appear in a later release.

Cautions

The Version 4.0F installation software does not discern between

Fibre Channel and Parallel SCSI disks. All are presented as potential install-to devices. If a Fibre Channel disk is selected, a portion of the installation process will succeed before an ultimate failure is encountered. This issue will be resolved in an upcoming release.

Fibre Channel disk devices can be added as secondary swap devices via fstab (4) or swapon (8). However, doing so usually places the FC device into the list of potential dump devices for the system. In the event of a system panic, the FC disk can be selected as a dump target. If so, the system will encounter a fatal error and will abort the dump process. This issue will be resolved in an upcoming release.

1–2 New and Changed Features

1.3 Logical Partitions for AlphaServer GS140 System

The logical partitioning feature allows a single AlphaServer GS140 system to be partitioned into as many as three logical partitions. Each partition runs a separate instance of the operating system. For a complete description of logical partitions, refer to the System Adminstration guide.

The minimum AlphaServer GS140 firmware revision for logical partitions support is Version 5.4.

At the time of Version 4.0F release, the AlphaServer GS140 Model 6-525 is the only system supported for logical partitioning. Refer to the Systems and

Options Catalog for information on newly-supported systems.

1.4 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

This version of Tru64 UNIX includes an upgraded and improved Dynamic

Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) database. The new database supports a new database format. Therefore, if you are currently using DHCP from a prior version of Tru64 UNIX, you must convert the database to the new format.

The improvements to DHCP include:

• Force broadcast reply

• Ignore hardware type

• Return bootfile in header

• Server policy consistency check

• Allow the server canonical name

For more information on DHCP, see the Network Administration guide, the

Technical Overview, and the joind (8) reference page.

1.5 ATM PACING VC Bandwidth Accounting Change

In this release, the bandwidth used by pacing virtual circuits (VCs) is not deducted from the total bandwidth in the constant bit rate (CBR) reserved resource pool. Therefore, ATM drivers can now overbook the driver’s bandwidth. In addition, reserved resources can be applied to CBR VCs only.

In previous releases of the operating system, the bandwidth used by pacing

VCs was deducted from the total bandwidth in the constant bit rate (CBR) reserved resource pool. This prevented ATM drivers that supported paced unspecified bit rate (UBR) traffic from allowing paced VCs to overbook the driver’s bandwidth.

New and Changed Features 1–3

1.6 Extensions to atom’s Programmable Interfaces

The atom command has been enhanced. It now provides a -pthread flag and RTL routines to help tool-writers develop thread safe program analysis tools, including support for deferred (but not asynchronous) thread cancellation. The cancellation support has some impact on the performance of thread-safe tools. See the atom (1), Thread (5), and pthread_setcanceltype (3) reference pages.

The atom command’s AddCallProto (5) instrumentation RTL routine now provides the FREGV argument type, to let tool writers pass floatingpoint register values to analysis routines.

The atom command’s -gp flag now retains all debug information in applications that were compiled with the -g option.

The atom command’s new -w2 switch suppresses warnings regarding analysis routines.

1.7 Ability to Examine the Stack of a User Program that

Caused a Kernel Crash Dump

You can now view the user stack of a program that precipitated a kernel crash dump. For more information, see Section 5.5.

1.8 Compaq Analyze Utility

The Compaq Analyze utility enables you to analyze binary error log files

(located in /var/adm/binary.errlog

). Refer to the System

Administration guide for information on using this new tool.

Compaq Analyze supports selected EV6-class processors in this release.

To function on a supported system, Compaq Analyze requires a modified

Common Error Log Header, which is created automatically if binlogd detects that the value of rpb_proctype is equivalent to ST_DEC_6600

(EV6-series processors). This modified header is supported by DECevent.

The AlphaServer 8400 (with EV6 processors) is not supported by Compaq

Analyze. This system is supported by DECevent using the older error log format.

1.9 Secure Version of syslog

The security of the syslog facility has been enhanced in this release.

Unless the domain host name of a remote host is entered in the local file,

/etc/syslog.auth

, the local system will not log any syslog messages from that remote host.

1–4 New and Changed Features

If you are installing the secure version of syslogd on a system, and you have configured or intend to configure other hosts to forward syslog messages to the system, refer to the syslogd (8) and syslog.auth

(4) reference pages.

1.10 Changes to VFS and AdvFS Tunable Attributes

The default value of the Virtual File System (VFS) vfs subsystem attribute name-cache-hash-size has changed from 256 to a dynamically calculated value. The new value is name-cache-size divided by 8 and rounded up to the next power of 2, or 8192, whichever is less.

On systems where the nchsz configuration variable in

/sys/conf/param.c

has been modified by the customer, the customerprovided value will be used. Compaq recommends that any previous customization of nchsz in the param.c

file be changed to: int nchsz;

Compaq also recommends that you use the default dynamic calculation of the size of the namei cache hash change table.

If a customer specified value is still desired, Compaq recommends modifying the value of name-cache-hash-size in /etc/sysconfigtab , instead of modifying nchsz in /sys/conf/param.c

. See sysconfigdb (8) for more information.

The default value of the AdvFS subsystem attribute AdvfsMaxDevQLen has changed from 80 to 24 (number of I/O requests). The new default of 24 reduces the number of I/O requests queued to a device. A lower value favors response time by reducing the number of I/O requests that may be already queued ahead of synchronous read and write requests.

A new AdvFS subsystem attribute, AdvfsCacheHashSize is added.

AdvfsCacheHashSize determines the size of the hash table for the buffers of the AdvFS buffer cache. The minimum value is 1024. The maximum value is 65536.

The default value is the size of the AdvFS buffer cache

( AdvfsCacheMaxPercent ) divided by 10 and rounded up to the next power of 2, or 8192, whichever is less. To save a small amount of space in the kernel at the expense of longer hash queue search time, the

AdvfsCacheHashSize can be set to a smaller value.

For more information about VFS and AdvFS tuning, refer to the System

Configuration and Tuning guide.

New and Changed Features 1–5

1.11 Visual Threads

Visual Threads is a new tool available on the Tru64 UNIX Associated

Products Volume 2 CD–ROM that lets you analyze your multithreaded applications for potential logic and performance problems. It is licensed as part of the Developer’s Toolkit for Tru64 UNIX.

You can use Visual Threads with DECthreads applications that use POSIX threads (Pthreads) and with Java applications.

Visual Threads features include the following:

• Detects violation conditions based on the application of particular rules in your application. Several predefined rules look for data protection errors, deadlock conditions, programming errors, and performance issues.

• Lets you use templates to define your own rules to specify criteria for violation conditions.

• Keeps track of the events associated with the violations.

• Records events to a trace file so that you can play back and analyze them later.

• Dynamically displays events as they occur, with controls for filtering.

• Suspends execution of the application when it detects violation conditions. You can choose from several options at this point, including invoking the debugger in the appropriate context for your application.

• Dynamically monitors multithreading objects (threads, mutexes, and so on) in real time.

• Provides easy access to object-level statistics and current state information, including use of resources (for example, the mutexes a particular thread holds).

1.12 Bootable Tape Enhancements

This release adds new functionality to the bootable tape facility. For more information, refer to the System Administration guide.

1.13 Compaq Advanced Printing Software

This release includes Compaq Advanced Printing Software Version 1.0 for

Tru64 UNIX. The software subsets and documentation are located on the

Tru64 UNIX Associated Products Volume 2 CD–ROM.

Advanced Printing Software, an implementation of Xerox Corporation’s

PrintXchange technology, is a flexible, distributed, client/server printing system based on ISO and POSIX standards.

1–6 New and Changed Features

This implementation supports a wide variety of popular printer devices and the common printer connection methods. The software subsets include server processes, command line utilities, and graphical user interface (GUI) tools that cater to the needs of end users and system administrators. The system can be configured as the primary print system, or it can work together with existing lpr/lpd based printing systems.

Documentation includes a System Administration and Operation Guide, a

Command Reference Guide, a User Guide, an Installation Guide, CDE Help, and Release Notes.

1.14 Netscape Communicator Version 4.5

This release of Tru64 UNIX contains Version 4.5 of Netscape

Communicator. For information about how to install, configure, and invoke

Communicator, see the Tru64 UNIX Installation Guide.

1.15 Compaq Insight Manager

This release provides Web-based Enterprise Management (WBEM) capabilities by integrating the Compaq Insight Manager Agents into Tru64

UNIX. Insight Manager enables Web-based browsing and monitoring of local and remote system hardware. You can activate these Web browsing features from a dedicated HTTP port, or from the Compaq Insight Manager

CIM32 or CIMXE Management Consoles running on Compaq Windows NT servers.

Refer to Section 4.3.9 for more information.

1.16 Support for Universal Serial Bus Keyboards and

Mice

Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a communications architecture that gives a computer system the ability to interconnect a variety of devices using a simple four-wire cable. The USB is actually a two-wire serial communication (receive and transmit) link that runs at either 1.5 or 12 megabits per second (mbs). The remaining two wires are used for power and ground. USB protocols can configure devices at startup or when they are plugged in at run time. These devices are broken into various device classes.

Each device class defines the common behavior and protocols for devices that serve similar functions.

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F provides limited USB support for keyboard and mouse devices only. For proper usage of USB keyboards and mice with

Version 4.0F, the following guidelines and restrictions apply:

New and Changed Features 1–7

• USB keyboards and mice must be attached to the system before the system is powered on.

• A non-USB keyboard and a USB keyboard cannot be used together on the same system. In the event that both types are attached, the non-USB keyboard has priority. The same rule applies for mice.

• If a USB keyboard is used, a USB mouse must also be used. It is not advisable to mix a non-USB keyboard with a USB mouse, as the system will be inoperable. The same rule applies for USB keyboards and non-

USB mice.

1.17 AltaVista Search on Documentation CD-ROM

The Tru64 UNIX Documentation CD-ROM now includes AltaVista

CD–ROM Search software, with a complete index of the HTML documentation set. The AltaVista software runs on an x86-based PC with

Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows NT Version 4.0 or higher.

1.18 Support for Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F includes preliminary support for the native DVD file system, called DVDFS, together with documentation. This preliminary implementation is not fully functional. See Section 4.3.14 for a description of the restrictions.

1.19 Availability of COM for Tru64 UNIX

COM for Tru64 UNIX is available for downloading from Compaq.

COM for Tru64 UNIX implements the Microsoft Common Object Model

(COM) as well as required underlying Windows capabilities on the Compaq

Tru64 UNIX platform.

Using COM for Tru64 UNIX, you can:

• Port COM server applications from 32-bit UNIX and Windows NT platforms to the Tru64 UNIX platform where they can take advantage of the Tru64 UNIX speed and storage capacity.

• Create wrappers for legacy Tru64 UNIX applications, providing COM access to these applications by Windows clients.

• Develop new distributed UNIX applications that take advantage of COM re-use, version independence, and language independence capabilities.

COM for Tru64 UNIX will be incorporated in the Tru64 UNIX operating system kit in a future release. It is licensed as an extension of the Tru64

1–8 New and Changed Features

UNIX product; no additional license is required to use the COM for Tru64

UNIX software on a system running the Tru64 UNIX operating system. It is available via download at no charge from the following URL: http://www.unix.digital.com/com

New and Changed Features 1–9

Installation Notes

This chapter discuss the following topics:

• Update installation

• Installation problems using console device EWE0

• Join database migration

Do not attempt to install Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F without first reading the notes appropriate to your processor in Chapter 3. Failure to read these notes can result in installation problems. Also, before you start your installation, be sure to review the hardware documentation that came with your system.

2.1 Update Installation

To update your operating system software to Version 4.0F, you must use the installupdate utility or the full installation procedure as described in the Installation Guide.

Version 4.0F supports update installations from Version 4.0D and Version

4.0E. See Appendix B for more information about disk space requirements before executing the installupdate utility.

Note that the -i flag for the installupdate command will be retired in a future version of Tru64 UNIX. See Section 8.28 for more information.

2.1.1

Recovering from Boot Problems After Update Installation

During an installation update from Version 4.0D or Version 4.0E to Version

4.0F, a number of system configuration files on the system are updated with new information. The changes to these configuration files are incorporated into the existing files on the installed system as part of the update processing.

The changes are merged into the existing files after the system is rebooted and running the new Version 4.0F generic vmunix kernel.

Depending on the hardware configuration and the content of the existing system configuration files, the new Version 4.0F generic vmunix kernel may fail to boot and run the final merge. This can occur when there are entries in the existing files on the installed system that are incompatible with the new kernel.

If the new Version 4.0F generic vmunix kernel fails to boot and complete the configuration of the updated system software, retry the boot using the c flag.

At the SRM console prompt, issue the following command:

>>> boot -flag c

Do not supply any other arguments. The c flag causes the booted kernel to use default values instead of the values contained in the old configuration files. After the new Version 4.0F generic vmunix kernel boots and completes merging the updates to all of the system files, the system should boot the

/genvmunix kernel successfully without using the c flag.

2.2 Installation Problems Using Console Device EWE0

On a system with more than four Tulip-style network devices, a user is limited to installation from the first four.

The install kernel is built knowing only of devices tu0 through tu3 . With recent network cards such as the DE504 (four network devices per card), it will become increasingly likely that a user will attempt installation from a higher numbered device. The boot will progress to the point where it attempts to mount the root device (console ewn0 , where n is e or further in the alphabet), and fail.

The workaround is to install from console devices ewa0 , ewb0 , ewc0 , or ewd0 .

2.3 Join Database Migration

If your system provides Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP),

Remote Installation Services (RIS), or Dataless Management Services (DMS) services to to other systems, you must update the database files for the join daemon after you complete the installation. See Section 4.4.11 for additional information.

2–2 Installation Notes

Processor-Specific Notes

This chapter contains notes that apply to the following computers:

• General notes on processors

• Personal Workstation 433au, 500au, and 600au systems

• AlphaServer 1000 and 1000A systems

• AlphaServer 8200, 8400, GS60 and GS140 systems

• Alpha VME 4/224, 4/288, and 5/nnn single board computers

• DMCC EBM2n class and EBM4n class single board computers

• DEC 7000 system

• AlphaPC 164 systems

3.1 General Notes on Processors

The following sections apply to more than one processor type.

3.1.1

Upgrading Your Hardware

You can follow the instructions in the Installation Guide and those provided by your hardware and firmware documentation when you add new options or change your system hardware. However, if the new option is supported only in the newest version of Tru64 UNIX, you must perform the upgrade in the following sequence:

1. Update your operating system software to the version that supports the new hardware or option.

2. Upgrade your firmware.

3. Upgrade your hardware or install the new option.

4. Follow the instructions in the Installation Guide for rebuilding your system kernel.

3.1.2

PCI-Based Systems with ATI Mach64 Graphics Controllers

On PCI machines that include ATI Mach64 graphics controllers in the configuration, you must set the console environment pci_parity variable to off . Due to a hardware limitation, hardware machine checks will occur if this variable is not turned off. Use the following commands:

>>> set pci_parity off

>>> init

3.1.3

PCI Shared Interrupt Support

In Version 3.2D and subsequent releases of the operating system, the PCIbased system and I/O support code is capable of shared interrupts. The only exception is the 53C810 (onboard or option) SCSI controller.

You can use the following console firmware command to determine if your system has a 53C810 SCSI controller:

>>> show config

To set up your PCI-based system to share interrupts, you must ensure the following:

• The firmware revision for your system supports shared interrupts.

• You have placed the option cards in PCI slots that allow sharing.

Refer to your layered product documentation (for example, for MME or

Open3D) for information about the shared interrupt capabilities of the software.

3.1.4

KZPSA Behind the PCI-to-PCI Bridge

On AlphaServer 1000A and 2100A class systems, updating the firmware on a

KZPSA SCSI adapter is not supported when the adapter is behind the PCIto-PCI bridge. See your hardware installation guide for further information.

A later version of the console firmware will support this feature.

3.1.5

Qlogic ISP1040B CAM Errors

On systems with a Qlogic ISP1040B option, CAM errors like the following may occur during bootup: pci2000 at pci0 slot 8 isp0 at pci2000 slot 0 isp0: QLOGIC ISP1020A cam_logger: CAM_ERROR packet cam_logger: bus 0 isp_probe

NVRAM parameters invalid, using driver Fast10 defaults

3–2 Processor-Specific Notes

To alleviate the error, you must use the eeromcfg utility to program the

NVRAM with the proper set of parameters. The eeromcfg utility is provided in the /mnt-pnt/utility directory of the Alpha Systems

Firmware Update CD-ROM. Consult the readme.txt

file in that same directory for information about how to use the utility.

3.1.6

DJ-ML200-xx PCI NVRAM Hardware Rev Must Be E01

The revision of the ML200-xx 2/4/8MB PCI NVRAM adapter must be revision E01.

3.1.7

RIS boot Options

To start a RIS installation on an AlphaServer 1200, 4000, 4100, 8200, or

8400, you must no longer specify the n option with the boot console firmware command, as in the following example:

>>> boot -fl n ewa0

If you specify the n option, the RIS installation kernel will panic. You can safely initiate a RIS installation by omitting the n option:

>>> boot ewa0

3.2 Personal Workstation 433au, 500au, and 600au

Systems

The following notes are specific to Compaq Personal Workstation class systems.

3.2.1

EIDE (ATAPI) CD–ROM Support

The Compaq Personal Workstation class systems contain two EIDE (ATAPI) ports.

Version 4.0F supports the use of ATAPI CD–ROM devices attached to the internal EIDE adapter of the Compaq Personal Workstation class systems.

The CD–ROM devices appear as SCSI rz devices. The device names for devices attached to the first EIDE port are rz0 and rz1. The device names for the devices attached to the second EIDE port are rz8 and rz9. The EIDE master devices are rz0 and rz8. The EIDE slave devices are rz1 and rz9.

The device names are reserved even if no devices are connected to those ports at the present time. Disks connected to the SCSI buses on the system are numbered rz16 and above.

Any Tru64 UNIX application designed to use a SCSI CD–ROM drive can use a supported EIDE CD–ROM drive through this software interface.

Processor-Specific Notes 3–3

3.2.2

64-Bit PCI Option Cards

The 64-bit PCI slots, slots 4 and 5, are intended only for those cards listed in the Systems and Options Catalog as supported for slots 4 and 5. The console prevents system operation and displays the following error if an unsupported card is present in these slots ( n ):

Illegal device detected on primary bus in physical slot n

Power down the system and remove the unsupported device from slot n

3.2.3

Incorrect Default Keyboard Mappings

If you use a PCXLA-NA keyboard on a Compaq Personal Workstation

433au, 500au, or 600au class system, the keys will not map properly unless you reconfigure the keyboard driver to use the correct keymaps.

You can do this by executing the following command:

# sysconfig -r gpc_input kbd_scancode=2

If you prefer, you can use the sysconfigdb command to add the following entry to the /etc/sysconfigtab file: gpc_input: kbd_scancode = 2

Note that if you execute the sysconfig command to reconfigure the driver, you must do this every time you reboot the system. Using the sysconfigdb utility to make the change preserves the information across reboots, and no other user intervention is required.

3.3 AlphaServer 1000 and 1000A Systems

The following notes are specific to AlphaServer 1000 and 1000A systems.

3.3.1

EISA Configuration Utility Diskette Version 1.10

This note applies to users who utilize the onboard Cirrus VGA graphics controller.

The default setting for the VGA graphic controller when running the EISA

Configuration Utility (ECU) Version 1.10 diskette is Disabled . For previous versions the default is Enabled .

When you run the ECU Version 1.10 for the first time on a system that was previously configured with an earlier version of the ECU diskette, the setting for the onboard VGA graphic controller is automatically set to Disabled .

While running the ECU, select Step 3: View and edit details and set the

VGA graphic controller to Enabled before exiting. If you do not set the

VGA graphic controller to Enabled prior to booting Tru64 UNIX, your X

3–4 Processor-Specific Notes

server will not start and you will use generic console support when you boot

Tru64 UNIX.

3.3.2

Graphics Resolution

The default graphics resolution for Compaq AlphaServer 1000A systems containing built-in Cirrus video with 1 MB of video ram is 1024x768. If the optional 512 KB of video ram is not present, Tru64 UNIX supports resolutions of 640x480 (by default) or 800x600 only.

The default resolution for Compaq AlphaServer 1000 systems that contain built-in Cirrus video with 512 KB of video ram is 640x480. This configuration also supports 800x600 resolution.

To use 800x600 resolution, edit the following line in the

/usr/lib/X11/xdm/Xservers file:

:0 local /usr/bin/X11/X

Change the line to:

:0 local /usr/bin/X11/X -screen0 800

To use 800x600 resolution for the CDE session manager, edit the following line in the /usr/dt/config/Xservers and Xservers.conf

files:

:0 Local local@console /usr/bin/X11/X :0

Change the line to:

:0 Local local@console /usr/bin/X11/X :0 -screen0 800

Before editing these files for XDM or CDE, be sure that your system’s monitor supports 800x600 resolution.

3.4 AlphaServer 8200, 8400, GS60 and GS140 Systems

The following note applies to the AlphaServer 8200, 8400, GS60, and GS140 systems.

3.4.1

Minimum Firmware Requirements

Before installing the Tru64 UNIX software kit, ensure that your system has the correct firmware version. The minimum firmware version required

Compaq AlphaServer 8200, 8400, GS60, and GS140 systems is Version 5.4.

If you have an earlier firmware version, update your firmware before installing the Version 4.0F software. For information on how to update your firmware, refer to the AlphaServer hardware documentation.

To determine the version of firmware on your system, enter the show

Processor-Specific Notes 3–5

version console firmware command at the prompt:

P##>>> show version

Note that ## is the primary processor number (usually 00).

3.5 Alpha VME 4/224, 4/288, and 5/nnn Single-Board

Computers

The Compaq Alpha VME 4/nnn and 5/nnn series are Compaq’s latest VMEbased single board computers (SBCs).

Support for the VME VIP/VIC64 VME adapter on the Compaq Alpha VME

4/nnn and 5/nnn series SBCs is the same as the support for this adapter on

Compaq AXPvme SBCs and Compaq Alpha VME 2100 systems. The following notes are specific to Compaq Alpha VME 4/nnn and 5/nnn SBCs.

3.5.1

Verify CPU Version

The sizer utility identifies Compaq Alpha VME 4/nnn and 5/nnn SBCs as

Compaq Alpha 4/nnn or 5/nnn family members.

The sizer -c command displays the following output for Compaq Alpha

VME 4/224 and 4/288 SBCs: sysname> sizer -c cpu "DECALPHAVME_224"

The sizer -c command displays the following output for Compaq Alpha

VME 5/nnn SBCs: sysname> sizer -c cpu "DECALPHAVME_320"

3.5.2

Firmware Requirements

Before installing the Tru64 UNIX software kit, make sure that your system has the correct firmware version. The minimum firmware versions required are Version 1.2 or higher for a Compaq Alpha VME 4/224 or 4/288 SBC, and Version 1.0 or higher for a Compaq Alpha VME 5/nnn SBC. If you have an earlier firmware version, update your firmware before installing the

Version 4.0F software. For information on how to update your firmware, refer to the firmware documentation.

To determine the version of firmware on your system, enter the following

3–6 Processor-Specific Notes

command at the console firmware prompt:

>>> show version

3.5.3

Restrictions and Known Problems

The following restrictions apply to Compaq Alpha VME 4/nnn and 5/nnn

SBCs.

3.5.3.1

Byte Addressability Not Supported by mmap (5/nnn Only)

In addition to sparse and dense addressing modes, the Compaq Alpha VME

5/nnn SBC hardware supports byte addressability. This includes the ability to perform simple math on a byte address to derive and access other byte addresses.

Currently, byte addressability is not supported by the Tru64 UNIX mmap interface.

VMEbus device drivers running on Compaq Alpha VME 5/nnn SBCs can continue to use the same sparse and dense space macros as in previous Tru64

UNIX releases and in existing VMEbus device drivers. Note that using the macros to access memory can help maintain the driver’s binary compatibility

(portability) across VMEbus platforms.

Byte addressability for Compaq Alpha VME 5/nnn SBCs will be supported in a future release of Tru64 UNIX.

3.5.3.2

VME Autovectors

The Compaq Alpha VME 4/nnn and 5/nnn SBCs do not support VME autovectors.

3.5.3.3

Network Port Termination

A Compaq Alpha VME 4/nnn or 5/nnn SBC that has the network configured in an UP state must have its external network connection properly terminated.

If the network connection is unplugged or not properly terminated, then the network software will periodically time out and perform a network reset.

This is normal for an unterminated Compaq Alpha VME system. However, it will cause high system latencies during the reset period, resulting in delays of about 10 milliseconds that can affect the realtime performance of the system.

Note that a loopback connector is not sufficient to terminate the network connection.

Processor-Specific Notes 3–7

3.5.4

Writing VMEbus Device Drivers

For information about writing VMEbus device drivers and configuring the

VMEbus on Compaq Alpha VME systems, refer to the vme_manual_setup (7) reference page.

3.5.5

CPU Boards Cannot Be Installed Until Operating System Is

Installed

If you are not currently running Version 4.0E, and are upgrading CPU boards, then you must install Version 4.0F before you upgrade your machine with the new AlphaServer 8200/8400 (Compaq AlphaServer GS60,GS140)

6/525 CPU boards.

3.5.6

Futurebus Backplane Is Not Supported

The Futurebus backplane is not supported when an AlphaServer 8200/8400 is upgraded to the Compaq AlphaServer GS60 and GS140 6/525. This hardware must be removed from the system.

3.6 DMCC EBM2n and EBM4n Class Single Board

Computers

The Modular Computing Components (DMCC) EBM2n-xx and EBM4n-xx are Compaq’s latest PCI/ISA-based single board computers (SBCs).

The EBM2n-xx is a PICMG-compliant processor card based on the Compaq

Alpha 21164 CPU. The EBM4n-xx is a PICMG-compliant processor card based on the Compaq Alpha 21064A CPU.

The following notes are specific to DMCC EBM2n class and EBM4n class single board computers.

3.6.1

Verify CPU Version

The sizer utility identifies Compaq DMCC EBM2n class and EBM4n class

SBCs as DMCC EBM2n or EBM4n family members. The sizer -c command displays the following output for Compaq DMCC EBM2n class

SBCs: sysname> sizer -c cpu "DECEV56_PBP"

The sizer -c command displays the following output for Compaq DMCC

3–8 Processor-Specific Notes

EBM4n class SBCs: sysname> sizer -c cpu "DECEV45_PBP"

3.6.2

Firmware Requirements

Before installing the Tru64 UNIX software kit, make sure that your system has the correct firmware version. The minimum firmware versions required for Compaq DMCC EBM2n and EBM4n class SBCs is Version 4.7 or higher. If you have an earlier firmware version, update your firmware before installing the Version 4.0F software. For information on how to update your firmware, refer to the firmware documentation.

To determine the version of firmware on your system, enter the following console firmware command at the prompt:

>>> show version

3.6.3

Restrictions and Known Problems

The following restrictions and known problems apply to Compaq DMCC

EBM2n class and EBM4n class SBCs.

3.6.3.1

Option Card Restrictions

You can use the DMCC EBM2n class and EBM4n SBCs on DMCC backplanes in the ETMXB-xx and ETMAB-xx family. The list of supported

DMCC backplanes currently includes the following:

222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Description of Backplane

ETMXB-BA 5-slot PICMG (2 PCI, 1 PCI/ISA, 1 ISA, 1 CPU)

ETMXB-AA 7-slot PICMG (2 PCI, 1 PCI/ISA, 3 ISA, 1 CPU) with onboard SCSI controller

7-slot PICMG (3 PCI, 1 PCI/ISA, 1 ISA, 2 CPU) ETMXB-DA

ETMXB-CA 9-slot PICMG (5 PCI, 1 PCI/ISA, 1 ISA, 2 CPU)

ETMXB-AB/ETMAB-AB 14-slot PICMG (7 PCI, 6 ISA, 1 CPU)

ETMXB-BB/ETMAB-BB 14-slot PICMG (10 PCI, 3 ISA, 1 CPU)

ETMXB-AC/ETMAB-AC 19-slot PICMG (10 PCI, 7 ISA, 2 CPU)

ETMXB-BC/ETMAB-BC 19-slot PICMG (13 PCI, 4 ISA, 2 CPU)

All ETMXB-xx/ETMAB-xx backplanes, except the 5-slot ETMXB-BA and the 7-slot ETMXB-AA and ETMXB-DA, use PCI-to-PCI bridge (PPB) technology to provide both primary (in front of the bridge) and secondary

Processor-Specific Notes 3–9

(behind the PPB) slots.

All ETMAB-xx backplanes are PCI Version 2.1 compliant.

Only the ETMXB-AA contains an onboard SCSI controller. The other

ETMXB-xx/ETMAB-xx backplanes require a SCSI option card.

The option cards shown in Table 3-1 work behind (as well as in front of) the bridge. You can plug these cards in to any available slot.

Table 3-1: Supported Options Behind the Bridge

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Option Type Part Number Description

Graphics

SCSI

SCSI

Network

SN-PBXGB-AA a

KZPAA-AA

SN-KZPBA-CA

DE450-CA

DE500-BA

TGA2 2MB PowerStorm 3D30

PCI-SCSI host bus adapter

PCI-SCSI Ultra Wide adapter

PCI NIC (TP, TW, AUI)

PCI NIC (TP)

Table note: a. The SN-PBXGB-AA (TGA2 PowerStorm 3D30) video card will work behind a bridge in multiple configurations if the first card is within the primary bus. For restrictions on jumper settings and X Server DMA for the PowerStorm 3D30 card, see Section 3.6.3.2.

When used with DMCC EBM2n SBCs (only), the SN-KZPBA-CA (PCI-

SCSI Ultra Wide adapter) requires the following console parameter to be set:

>>> set pci_prefetch SMS

3.6.3.2

PBXGB-AA (TGA2 PowerStorm 3D30) Video Card Restrictions

The following restrictions apply to the PBXGB-AA (TGA2 PowerStorm

3D30) video card that is listed in Table 3-1:

• EV5 Alias jumper setting (EBM2n only)

For EBM2n SBCs only, you must set the EV5 Alias jumper on the

PowerStorm 3D30 card to On.

• VGAEN jumper settings

Only one PowerStorm 3D30 card can have its VGAEN jumper set to On.

This card must be positioned in a primary PCI slot for the SRM Console to be displayed. All other PowerStorm 3D30 cards must have their

VGAEN jumpers set to Off but may be positioned in any PCI slot.

3–10 Processor-Specific Notes

For more information about the jumpers, see the PBXGB-AA/CA PCI

Graphics Option Owner’s Guide provided with the card.

• X Server DMA write operations must be disabled for some configurations

Some configurations of PowerStorm 3D30 cards on Compaq EBM2n and

EBM4n SBCs require that you disable X Server direct memory access

(DMA) write operations. Specifically, you must disable these operations if there are multiple PowerStorm 3D30 cards in the system, or if any

PowerStorm 3D30 graphics card is installed behind the PCI-PCI bridge

(PPB).

3.6.3.3

General Restrictions

The Tru64 UNIX operating system does not support the operator control panel or watchdog timer. These server management features are supported only in the hardware and firmware.

3.6.4

Hardware Configuration for DMCC Eight-Headed Graphics

Systems

This section describes how to configure a Modular Computing Components

(DMCC) system to run eight-headed graphics under the Tru64 UNIX operating system.

You can configure DMCC platforms that contain a EBM2n-AZ Alpha

PICMG single-board computer (SBC) and multiple PowerStorm 3D30 graphics cards to run multiheaded graphics, controlling up to eight monitors at a time.

3.6.4.1

Hardware and Software Requirements

Running eight-headed graphics on a DMCC system requires the following:

• An EBM2n-AZ Alpha PICMG SBC and eight PowerStorm 3D30 graphics cards within a fully configured DMCC system.

• A DMCC backplane and enclosure with at least 10 PCI slots, 512 MB main memory, a DMCC-qualified Ethernet card, and all the other storage and I/O options normally required for such a system. See the DMCC

Order Configuration Guide, which is available on the Compaq OEM

Web site at: http://www.digital.com/oem/

• The SBC occupies a CPU slot and the graphics cards must occupy eight

PCI slots.

• You must be running Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0E or higher, and you must be running the latest DMCC SRM code from Version 5.2 or higher of the

Processor-Specific Notes 3–11

Firmware CD-ROM.

The following DMCC configuration has been qualified by Compaq for running eight-headed graphics under Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0E:

• Alpha 21164/366 MHz SBC with 2 MB cache and Tru64 UNIX license

(EBM21-AZ)

• 512 MB main memory (2 x EBXMA-HC, for a total of four 128MB

DIMMs)

• Desktop enclosure with 14-slot PICMG backplane: 10 PCI, 3 ISA, 1 SBC

(ETM33-BD)

• Eight PowerStorm 3D30 graphics cards (8 x SN-PBXGB-AA)

• PCI Ethernet card (DE450-CA)

• PCI fast/narrow SCSI controller (KZPAA-AA)

• Mandatory or associated options such as floppy, hard, and CD–ROM drives, cable kit for PICMG enclosure, and power cord

• DMCC SRM code from the Version 5.2 Firmware CD–ROM

3.6.4.2

Hardware Setup

When you configure the DMCC 15-slot platform for eight-headed graphics, placement of the graphics cards is critical.

The configuration described in the Hardware and Software Requirements section, and qualified by Compaq, uses an ETM33-BD desktop enclosure with 14-slot backplane. Within that enclosure, the PCI option cards must be placed into PCI slots in top to bottom order as follows:

• Secondary 32-bit PCI bus connectors

– KZPAA SCSI card

– PowerStorm graphics card: SCREEN 2

– PowerStorm graphics card: SCREEN 3

– PowerStorm graphics card: SCREEN 4

– DE450 Ethernet card

– PowerStorm graphics card: SCREEN 5

– PowerStorm graphics card: SCREEN 6

– PowerStorm graphics card: SCREEN 7

• Primary 64-bit PCI bus connectors

– PowerStorm graphics card: SCREEN 0 (VGA ENABLED)

3–12 Processor-Specific Notes

– PowerStorm graphics card: SCREEN 1

For reference, the power connector is situated above the PCI slots, and the

CPU and ISA connectors below.

All PowerStorm cards must have the ALIAS jumper in and VGA EN jumper out, except the SCREEN 0 card, which must be VGA enabled.

3.6.4.3

Software Setup

After you complete the hardware configuration for the eight-headed system, you can set up the Tru64 UNIX software to operate the eight screens as one row of eight screens (8x1) or two rows of four screens (4x2).

By default in a multiheaded configuration, the screens are operated as 8x1.

To set up the screens in a 4x2 combination, you must edit your system’s X

Window System server configuration file,

/usr/var/X11/Xserver.conf

.

Instructions for editing this file in order to customize the X server configuration are provided in the Xserver (1X) reference page.

To set up 4x2 operation, you need to specify –edge_top ,

–edge_bottom , –edge_right , and –edge_left command-line arguments that arrange and attach the screens as you want them. Each argument takes scr1 and scr2 values, which are the numbers of the screens you are attaching.

For example, you could arrange the eight screens as follows:

/---------------\

| 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |

|---------------|

| 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 |

\---------------/

To achieve this combination, add the following information to the command-line arguments section of Xserver.conf

:

! you specify command line arguments here args <

-pn

-edge_top0 4 -edge_top1 5 -edge_top2 6 -edge_top3 7

-edge_bottom4 0 -edge_bottom5 1 -edge_bottom6 2 -edge_bottom7 3

-edge_right0 1 -edge_right1 2 -edge_right2 3

-edge_right4 5 -edge_right5 6 -edge_right6 7

-edge_left1 0

-edge_left5 4

-edge_left2 1

-edge_left6 5

-edge_left3 2

-edge_left7 6

>

Processor-Specific Notes 3–13

3.7 AXPvme Single Board Computers

For information on how to configure AXPvme single board computers, see the Writing VMEbus Device Drivers manual.

The following notes are specific to the AXPvme SBCs.

3.7.1

Firmware Upgrade Required

Compaq AXPvme SBCs must upgrade to Version 17.0 or higher of the

AXPvme firmware to run Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F.

3.7.2

Unpredictable Results When Performing Master Block

Transfers

The following restriction applies to the VIP/VIC adapter used on Compaq

AXPvme SBCs and Compaq Alpha VME 2100 systems.

Performing master block transfers with a data width of D64 can produce unpredictable results in the following cases:

• If D64 slave access is performed before memory has been mapped to the

VMEbus.

• If memory access does not coincide with the appropriate access mode, such as attempting user access to memory specified as supervisory mode access.

• If the AXPvme SBC or Alpha VME 2100 system is a VME interrupter and is targeted for D64 slave access. The interrupt vector presented by the VME interrupter may not be the vector specified in the vba_post_irq function.

Memory must be mapped to the VMEbus prior to D64 slave access.

Access to memory must coincide with the appropriate access mode. If supervisory mode access is specified when memory is mapped, memory accesses must use supervisory mode. If user mode access is specified, both supervisory and user access are allowed.

See the Writing VMEbus Device Drivers manual for more information on slave and master block transfers.

3.8 DEC 7000 System

The following note is specific to the DEC 7000 system.

3–14 Processor-Specific Notes

3.8.1

Misleading Error Message Displayed During Installation

During installation of Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F software on a DEC 7000 system, the following message might appear on the console screen: prom_saveenv: console returned illegal value

You should ignore this message and follow the instructions displayed on the screen by the installation process.

3.9 AlphaPC 164 Systems

During an initial installation of Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F software on some

AlphaPC 164 family systems, the installation procedure might hang while setting the console environment variables prior to rebooting the system with the new software. The problem does not occur during an update installation because console environment variables are not reset.

This problem is due to a limitation in the console firmware for the systems on which it is observed. The use of the consvar command, or attempts to modify parameters in the bparm subsystem through use of the sysconfig

-r command also cause these systems to hang. To avoid this problem, change console environment variables directly at the SRM console prompt instead of through the privileged kernel interfaces.

If your AlphaPC 164 family system hangs during initial installation, you should power cycle the system and then set the console environment variables to reflect the correct boot device and boot mode. When you reboot the system, the installation procedure will continue with system configuration.

For example, if the system software is installed on the disk connected as unit

0 on SCSI bus 0 (that is, on rz0), then enter the following commands when the system powers up to the SRM console prompt ( >>> ):

>>> set bootdef_dev dka0

>>> set boot_osflags A

>>> set auto_action boot

The next time the system powers up, it will automatically boot from the freshly-installed disk and prepare to come up in multiuser mode. You can boot immediately from the console prompt by entering the boot command, or you can power cycle the system.

Processor-Specific Notes 3–15

Base System Software Notes

This chapter contains notes about issues and known problems with the base operating system and, whenever possible, provides solutions or workarounds to those problems.

The following topics are discussed:

• Commands and utilities

• SysMan System Management graphical user interface

• System administration

• Network and communications

• Local Area Transport

• File systems

4.1 Commands and Utilities

The following notes apply to commands and utilities.

4.1.1

Escaped Comment Symbols in a Makefile

The make command will not recognize escaped comment symbols as literal characters in a Makefile. Comment lines that begin with a # (number sign) and all text following this symbol up to the end of the line are considered part of a comment. This is also true even if the symbol is preceded with a backslash ( \ ).

4.1.2

Security

The following notes describe problems that may occur when using commands and utilities under certain security settings.

4.1.2.1

Unexpected Command Behavior with ACLs

Programs cannot reliably inspect the permission bits in the stat structure and determine the access that will be granted to a particular user. On local file systems, read-only mounts and Access Control Lists (ACLs) can both modify the access that will be allowed. On remote file systems, in addition

to read-only mounts and ACLs, there may be additional controls that can alter the permitted access such as:

• ID mapping

• Mandatory access control

• Additional authentication requirements

Programs that copy files to update them, rather than updating them in place, often do not preserve ACLs. Some programs that have this problem are gzip , compress , and emacs .

The best solution for programs that need to make access decisions is for the program to use the access() call to determine what access will be granted.

Note that even this may not work as the access protections of the file could be changed between the access() call and the read , write , or execute operation.

For programs that copy files, the following command will copy a file while preserving ACLs and any other extended attribute (property list):

# cp -p

See the acl (4) and proplist (4) reference pages for more information.

4.1.2.2

ACLs and Archive Tools

The pax , tar , and cpio archive tools might not restore ACLs on files in the manner you think that they should be restored. Always check the ACLs on your files after saving and restoring them with any of these tools.

4.1.3

Emacs Can Lose ACL File Settings

By default, the Emacs editor will rename the original file and save the new file as a copy under the original name. If the original file had an Access

Control List (ACL) it will now apply to the backup file. If the directory had a default ACL, the new file (original file name) will now have the default

ACL instead of the original ACL. If the directory did not have a default

ACL, the new file will be protected only by the file permission bits.

The Emacs editor has some user-preference variables that you can set to control which file will retain the original ACL. The relevant Emacs variables are:

• backup-by-copying

• backup-by-copying-when-mismatch

• backup-by-copying-when-linked

4–2 Base System Software Notes

4.1.4

Some Emacs Command Line Options Fail

Compaq ships the Emacs software as it is received from the source. The following command line options do not work as documented in the emacs(1) reference page: -cr , -geometry , -i , -ib , -iconic ,

-iconname , -in , -internal borderwidth , -mc , -T , and -title .

In some cases, a workaround is available by using an appropriate X resource.

4.1.5

New Tunable Parameter for Running Oracle8

If Oracle8 running on Tru64 UNIX hangs, look for the following console message: malloc_wait:X : no space in map.

If this message is present add the following to /etc/sysconfigtab : generic: kmem-percent=XXX

In this example, XXX is the size of the kernel malloc map. By default, XXX is set to 25 percent of physical memory. Increase this parameter to 50 and reboot the system. If Oracle8 continues to hang, increase this parameter up to

100.

4.1.6

Change to Format of ipcs Command

The output format of the ipcs command has been modified. The KEY field now presents the value in hexadecimal format instead of decimal. This change is compatible with other UNIX implementations and conforms to the upcoming X/Open UNIX 98 standard.

4.1.7

Sendmail

The following notes apply to sendmail .

4.1.7.1

New sendmail Version 8.8.8

The sendmail program has been upgraded to Version 8.8.8 as the default version for Tru64 UNIX. The current version, Version 5.65, is still available for use.

The new version, known as V8, has become the de facto standard in the industry, especially for ISPs. Some of the features and enhancements provided with this new version include masquerading, virtual domains, relay control, and spam blocking. For more information, see the sendmail book by

O’Reilly and Associates, or the sendmail Installation and Operations Guide, or the sendmail (8) and sendmail.cf

(4) reference pages. The sendmail

Installation and Operations Guide is included in PDF format on the

Base System Software Notes 4–3

Supplementary Documents bookshelf of the online Tru64 UNIX documentation.

You can configure sendmail using the mailconfig or mailsetup applications. During an update installation, the system will attempt to update your existing sendmail.cf

file to comply with this new version. This updated sendmail.cf

is compatible with both new and old version of sendmail .

To continue using the previous version of sendmail , invoke the following command as root:

/sbin/init.d/sendmail select old

This will change all links related to sendmail to point to the version previous to Version 8.0. Once you are ready to use the new version, you can switch back by invoking the following command:

/sbin/init.d/sendmail select v8.8.8

4.1.7.2

Initial sendmail Configuration

When the system is first booted, after a full installation, the sendmail software is automatically configured. This takes a noticable amount of time, and no status message is displayed until the following warning message is displayed as a result of starting sendmail : warning: local host name(hostname) is not qualified; fix $j in config file.

This means the system does not have a qualified name. This is because neither bind nor mail has been configured. The sendmail program will continue to operate.

Ignore this warning.

4.1.7.3

Warning Message When sendmail Updates the alias Database

The sendmail program gives the following warning message when it is started and its alias database is updated:

WARNING: writable directory /var/adm/sendmail

When sendmail initializes the alias database, it checks the modes on system directories and files to determine if they have been compromised.

Because the permission on the /var directory is 775, the sendmail program gives a warning message because it expects the permission on /var

4–4 Base System Software Notes

to be set as follows: chmod go-w /var

Ignore this warning.

4.1.7.4

Mail to user@localhost Fails

When a user sends mail to <user>@localhost , the sendmail utility resolves it as <user>@localhost.<domain name> . As a result, if you do not have a system localhost in your domain, your mail will bounce back.

Instead of sending mail to <user>@localhost , send it to <user> only.

4.1.8

The tar Command h Option Does Not Work As Documented

The h option to the tar command, which expands symbolic links to real files and directories in the archive, does not work as documented. Do not use the h option. This problem will be fixed in a future release.

If you must use the h option, use the version of the tar command installed in /usr/opt/obsolete from the OSFOBSOLETE440 optional subset.

4.1.9

Netscape Communicator

The following notes apply to the Netscape Communicator.

4.1.9.1

Netscape Communicator Dumps Core Running in CDE

Netscape Communicator dumps core when the application posts a file selection dialog ( XmFileSelectionBox ). Typically, this occurs when you are running the application in the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) and select the Save As option in the File pulldown menu of the Navigator browser. It can also occur when you select a link to download a file or save an attachment to a mail message in the Messenger Mailbox component.

To avoid this problem, invoke Netscape using the

/usr/bin/X11/netscape script.

As long as this script is used to start Netscape Communicator, the application will display the file selection dialog within CDE without core dumping. Use the -xrm ’*nsMotifFSBCdeMode: True’ command-line option if you are starting Netscape Communicator using some other means.

For more information, see the Communicator on UNIX release notes at the

Base System Software Notes 4–5

Netscape Web site: http://home.netscape.com/eng/mozilla/4.0/relnotes/unix-4.0.html

4.1.9.2

Netscape Communicator Core Dumps If mailto: Link Is Selected

In a Web Page

Clicking on a mailto: HTML link in a web page displayed with Netscape

Communicator’s Navigator web browser causes Communicator to core dump.

This is a known problem scheduled to be fixed in a future release. The workaround is to start the Mailbox Messenger component from the

Messenger option in the Communicator pulldown menu before selecting the mailto: link.

4.1.9.3

Deleting Multiple Mail Messages Causes Netscape

Communicator to Core Dump

Deleting multiple mail messages in Netscape Communicator’s Messenger

Mailbox component sometimes causes Communicator Version 4.5 to core dump. Usually, it requires several multiple deletions of mail to make

Communicator core dump. If Communicator does not core dump immediately, deleted messages might reappear in the mail folder from which they were deleted.

4.1.9.4

Netscape Communicator Dumps Core Intermittently

Netscape Communicator intermittently dumps core and returns the following error in the terminal window from which it is started:

Memory Fault - (core dumped)

This core dump occurs with different hardware and software configurations and under different circumstances. Sometimes it hangs for a time, taking most of the CPU time, then it crashes. At other times, its process has to be killed and the application restarted. Numerous problems of this nature have been reported. None are resolved at this time and no workaround is available.

In all cases, the behavior cannot be reproduced consistently.

4.1.9.5

Cannot Delete Mail Messages From Inbox to Trash When Using

IMAP Server

After upgrading to Netscape Communicator Version 4.5 from a previous version of Communicator, an IMAP mail user cannot move messages to the

Trash folder in the Messenger component. All Delete options in the user interface are insensitive (greyed-out). Setting the Move it to trash folder option in the IMAP mail server preferences window does not work. This behavior is the result of a new feature in Netscape Communicator Version

4.5 that might require user customization after upgrading to this version.

4–6 Base System Software Notes

Starting with Netscape Communicator Version 4.5, the Namespace extension to the standard IMAP protocol is used to locate the users folders on the

IMAP mail server. This feature will not work if you are using an older IMAP server that does not support the Namespace extension to the protocol. Use the following procedure to customize Netscape Communicator to be able to locate a user’s Trash folder on an old IMAP server:

1. Select the Preferences option in the Edit pulldown menu and choose the

Mail and News Servers option in the Preferences window.

2. In the options displayed below this option, select the Mail Servers option.

3. Find the IMAP server in the scrolled list of servers. Select it and choose the Edit button to edit the server configuration.

4. In the pop-up dialog box that is displayed, choose the Advanced tab.

5. Ensure that the Namespace field in the tab reads (quotes and period included) as follows:

Namespace: "INBOX."

6. Click on the OK button in the pop-up window and again in the

Preferences window to save the settings.

7. Exit and restart Communicator.

You should be able to move messages to the Trash folder and all the Delete options should now be sensitive (dark letters). Because IMAP mail server configurations differ (including the location of the user’s folders on the server), check with your IMAP mail server administrator if the above procedure fails to resolve the problem.

4.1.9.6

Communicator Returns sh: /usr/bin/X11/showps: not found

When you select a link to a PostScript file in the Navigator component of

Communicator, it might return the following error: sh: /usr/bin/X11/showps: not found

The showps helper application has been retired from Tru64 UNIX as a result of licensing changes to Adobe Display PostScript. The user may have customized the PostScript Document MIME type to use the showps helper application in $HOME/.mailcap

and $HOME/.mime.types

files.

To resolve this problem, you must obtain a new PostScript viewer and reconfigure the helper application for the PostScript Document MIME type in

Communicator. Use the Edit option in the Edit-Preferences-Navigator-

Applications pulldown menu of Communicator to edit your PostScript

Document helper application and replace /usr/bin/X11/showps with the path to your new PostScript viewer.

Base System Software Notes 4–7

4.1.9.7

Installing Open3D Causes Netscape Communicator to Core

Dump

Netscape Communicator crashes when scrolling Web pages in Navigator or when editing bookmarks on a system with Open3D installed and a

PowerStorm 4D5T graphics option after upgrading from Version 4.0D or later of the operating system. In general, Communicator and some other applications become unstable on this system configuration. The workaround is to set shells DISPLAY variable to local:0 before starting Netscape

Communicator. Another option is to display Netscape Communicator remotely from another system without Open3D installed on it.

4.1.9.8

Netscape Communicator Version 4.5 Form Handling Problem in

Asian Locales

Netscape Communicator Version 4.5 has a form handling problem when running under the Asian locales, such as Japanese or Chinese. The input data field is cleared after the data is submitted. Web applications that use the input field value might not work properly. A workaround is to start Communicator in C locale, for example:

% setenv LANG C

% netscape

4.1.10

Do Not Use Current Directory Character with setld

Do not specify the current directory "." character as the location argument for setld , as shown in in the following example:

% cd /mnt/ALPHA/BASE

% setld -l .

Instead, use the directory path as the location argument, for example:

% setld -l /mnt/ALPHA/BASE

4.2 SysMan System Management Graphical User

Interface

The following sections apply to restrictions on using the SysMan applications.

4.2.1

Account Manager

The following notes apply to Account Manager, dxaccounts .

4–8 Base System Software Notes

4.2.1.1

Copying Accounts and UID

When copying user accounts via cut and paste or drag and drop, the Allow

Duplicate UIDs option in the General Preferences dialog box will be honored. For example, when making a copy of user account that has a UID of 200, if the Allow Duplicate UIDs check box is off (the default), the resulting copy will have a unique UID automatically generated. If the Allow

Duplicate UIDs check box is on, then the copy will have an identical UID.

The same rules apply to copying groups.

4.2.1.2

Account Manager Restrictions

The Account Manager has the following restrictions on both base security and enhanced security (C2) systems:

• Using mouse button 1 (MB1) to drag and drop users, groups, or templates does a copy operation, not a move operation. This is different from the

CDE/Motif default where MB1 performs a drag and drop move operation and Shift-MB1 is required to perform a copy operation. For example, using MB1 to drag a user from the Local Users view and dropping it in the NIS Users view creates a copy of that user in NIS.

Workaround: Delete the original icon after the copy has been completed.

• The Account Manager allows you to specify the minimum and maximum range for a UID or GID. However you cannot specify the starting value in the range.

Workaround: Use the usermod or groupmod commands to set a starting value within the range: usermod -D -x next_uid=xxx usermod -D -x next_gid=xxx

Suppose the minimum UID is 100 and the maximum UID is 10000.

Then the following line would cause the Account Manager to start generating UIDs from 5000: usermod -D -x next_uid=5000

• If you change a user’s UID with Account Manager, the ownership of the user’s files and subdirectories do not change, and under certain circumstances, the home directory ownership may not change either. For instance, if you attempt to change the UID of user johndoe from 200 to

201, the files and subdirectories under his home directory will still belong to UID 200. Furthermore, if johndoe does not own his home directory, the ownership of that directory will not change either.

Workaround: Use the chown command to change the directory and files, if applicable.

Base System Software Notes 4–9

• You cannot drag and drop items across different instances of Account

Manager. For example, if Account Manager A on system 1 and Account

Manager B on system 2 are both being displayed on the same workstation, then you cannot drag and drop between Account Manager A and B.

Workaround: Use the copy/paste feature to copy users, groups, or templates from Account Manager A to B.

• Restriction: Two system administrators should not run two different concurrent instances of Account Manager.

Workarounds: Account manager correctly allows two or more system administrators to work on the same password files simultaneously. The proper file locking will occur and new accounts can be added or modified.

However, the local groups file, /etc/group , and the NIS groups file,

/var/yp/src/group , are written out after each group modification.

Therefore, the last system administrator to make a change in a group’s view window would overwrite any prior changes from a different system administrator. For this reason, running multiple, concurrent Account

Manager instances is not recommended.

• When running Account Manager from a terminal window, occasionally the following message might be written to stdout:

Warning: DtComboBoxWidget: Unable to find item to select

Workaround: None. You can safely ignore these messages.

4.2.1.3

Account Manager Problems

Leading and trailing white space is not stripped from text entry areas. This could lead to confusion, for example, if a field on the Find dialog box contains a space character before the desired search string. The search string would not match because of the spurious space character.

4.2.1.4

Enhanced Security Account Manager Problems

The following problems apply to Account Manager when running on enhanced security systems:

• The Lock/Unlock Toolbar and Menu Options are inactive for the

Template views.

Workaround: Change the template lock setting on the Create/Modify

Template dialog screen after selecting the template by double clicking on the template icon in the Template view icon box.

• The C1Crypt Encryption Type restricts the password length to between 6 and 8 characters even though the Password Controls’ Minimum Length and Maximum Length fields imply otherwise.

4–10 Base System Software Notes

Workaround: Set passwords through /usr/tcb/bin/dxchpwd or the

/usr/bin/passwd command when the C1Crypt Encryption type is chosen.

• Do not set a template Encryption Type to C1Crypt as this will invalidate the template.

Workaround: Set the C1Crypt Encryption type for the user from the

Create/Modify User dialog.

• Account Manager does not enforce the minimum/maximum password length limitation when setting passwords.

Workaround: Set passwords through /usr/tcb/bin/dxchpwd or the

/usr/bin/passwd command if the minimum/maximum password length limitation is necessary.

• The Pointer Focus Prompt message in the status line of the Icon Box will display Delete instead of Retire when the mouse pointer is in the Retire toolbar icon.

• Error messages generated from the Create/Modify Template dialog box refer to the user name when they should refer to the template name.

• On enhanced security system, you typically retire users instead of deleting them. However, there are times when you might want to delete a user account. Account Manager supports retiring user accounts but not deleting them.

Workaround: To delete a user account you must do the following:

1. Manually edit the /etc/passwd and /etc/group files to remove references to the user.

2. Use the following command to remove the user from the protected password database:

# /usr/tcb/bin/edauth -r <user name>

• Renaming a user by changing the Username field of the Create/Modify

User dialog box in Modify mode does not clean up the protected password database entry for the old name.

Workaround: Use the following command to remove the dangling protected password database entry:

# /usr/tcb/bin/edauth -r <user name>

• Do not rename a template by changing the Template name field of the

Create/Modify Template dialog box in Modify mode. Account Manager actually creates a new template without removing the old template.

However, the old template’s icon is removed from the Icon Box.

Workaround: Restart Account Manager to restore the former template icon. Use the Delete Toolbar icon or the Edit->Delete... option from the

Base System Software Notes 4–11

Template view to delete the undesired template

• Accounts and templates inherit their settings either from locally defined values in their protected password database entry or from the templates that they may reference. All accounts and templates implicitly reference a default template. The default template is not served by NIS. This creates an inconsistency for Account Manager when displaying NIS user accounts and templates on an NIS master. The user and template values displayed may be the default template values of the NIS master. When an NIS user logs into a NIS client, the NIS client’s default template might be different from the NIS master’s default template. The client’s default template is used to establish the user’s account settings.

• Using drag and drop to copy a user account copies the user’s template references by value when the user account is being dropped on a different view. This means that the template itself will no longer be referenced by the newly created account. Instead, the template’s values will be contained directly in the new user’s protected password database entry.

For example, assume the local user Joe has an account based on the developers template. If you drag and drop Joe’s account from the

Developers view into the NIS Users view, the attributes from the developers template will be placed into the protected password database entry for Joe’s account. This preserves Joe’s developer attributes and overrides any corresponding attributes from the default template for NIS users.

Workaround: Modify the copied user’s account and change the template from the default to the desired template. Note that the template reference is maintained if the user is dropped within the same view.

• Dropping a template icon on a user changes the user’s account to use that template. However, the template’s lock attribute is not honored. For example, if the template developer has the lock field enabled, then dropping this template on a user should cause the account to be locked but it does not.

Workaround: Only the drag and drop method of template assignment has this problem. You can use the Create/Modify dialog box to change a single user’s template or use the Modify Selected dialog box to change templates for several selected users. Both methods correctly propagate the template’s lock field.

• Dragging and dropping a template onto a user’s account displays a confirmation message in the view’s status line. This message incorrectly displays template %2 instead of the template’s name.

Workaround: None.

• Deleting a newly created template (the template was created after starting

Account Manager) will cause the application to crash.

4–12 Base System Software Notes

Workaround: Restart Account Manager and then delete the template.

• After deleting a template, the NIS maps are not remade.

Workaround: Manually remake the NIS maps or perform an Account

Manager function (for example, Account Modification) that will trigger the maps to be remade. To manually remake the maps do the following:

# cd /var/yp

# make all

4.2.2

BIND Configuration

The following problems apply to configuring BIND servers with the BIND configuration graphical user interface.

• Once entered, a zone cannot be deleted by clicking on the delete button in the Zones window.

Workaround: Edit the /etc/namedb/named.boot

file to remove the zone entry that needs to be deleted.

• At least one Forwarder must be entered in the Forwarder window if any

Zones are to be added.

Workaround: If the Forwarder is not needed, you can edit the

/etc/namedb/named.boot

file to remove the Forwarder entry after you Commit to the setup in the BIND configuration interface.

• If your host is already configured as BIND server, and the BIND configuration interface is used to add, delete, or append forwarders, all of the existing Zones in /etc/namedb/named.boot

file will be deleted if the Zones button is not clicked first.

Workaround: Whenever you modify your BIND setup using the BIND configuration interface, click on the Zones button before you Commit to any changes.

• The Server Addr field of secondary domain in the Modify Zone window cannot be modified using the BIND configuration interface.

Workaround: The address can be modified by editing the secondary domain entry in the /etc/namedb/named.boot

file.

4.2.3

The dxshutdown Application Does Not Prohibit Logins

The dxshutdown application does not create the /etc/nologin file as described in the documentation. This means that users will be able to log in to a machine that is being shut down up until the actual time of the shut down.

Base System Software Notes 4–13

Note that this behavior differs from that of the shutdown command that creates the /etc/nologin file at 5 minutes prior to the shutdown.

4.3 System Administration

The following notes apply to system administration.

4.3.1

License Management Facility Allows Year 2000 Testing

Certain software license PAKs include expiration dates that currently limit the ability to run software when the date is set well into the future (into the year 2000). While most customers do not have PAKs with expiration dates, those who do (such as CSLG, ASAP, or Partner PAK Program members) may benefit from the following enhancements.

The lmf utility and supporting code have been enhanced to allow customers with expiring software license PAKs to set the system date beyond the expiration dates within a specific time window to allow Year 2000 (Y2K) testing.

Also, a test PAK, 00Y2K-TESTING , is available for use with Version 4.0D

and higher of the operating system. If you have expiring license PAKs, you can install this test PAK, allowing your PAKs to operate beyond their expiration dates between the dates of December 1, 1999 and March 2, 2000.

The test PAK allows you to conduct Y2K testing within the specified time window.

For information about obtaining the 00Y2K-TESTING PAK and other Y2K issues, see the Tru64 UNIX Year 2000 Readiness white paper, available in

HTML format on the Tru64 UNIX 4.0F Documentation, Volume 1

CD–ROM. This document is also available on the Tru64 UNIX web page at the following URL: http://www.unix.digital.com/unix/year2000/whitepaper.html

Once you obtain and install the 00Y2K-TESTING PAK and set the system date forward for Y2K testing, you must execute the following command from the root account the first time run level 3 (also referred to as "init 3" or

"multiuser mode") is entered after each system boot:

# /usr/sbin/lmf reset

This will ensure that all software licenses are loaded while the system date is set within the Y2K testing window. You need to execute this command only once within run level 3 between each system boot. You can toggle the system between run level 1 and run level 3 after the first execution of the command in run level 3. You will only be required to execute the command again after rebooting the system.

4–14 Base System Software Notes

4.3.2

EISA Configuration Utility Revision Requirements

For Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F and its software supplements, the supported version of the EISA Configuration Utility (ECU) is Version 1.10 or higher.

If your system is configured with an EISA bus, you should update the ECU to this supported version.

4.3.3

Open3D Support

Consult the Open3D Software Product Description (SPD) before installing

Open3D to ensure that this layered product is supported on your system.

Installing Open3D on systems not supported by the Open3D layered product can leave your system in an unusable state.

4.3.4

Opening a Write-Protected Tape in Write Mode

The behavior of the open call to a tape device has changed. You can no longer use write mode to open a write protected tape. The attempt to open the tape will fail, returning the following message:

EACCES (permission denied).

If an application is written so that it attempts to open the tape device with

O_RDWR when the intention is only to read the tape, the open attempt will fail. Applications should be changed to open the device with O_RDONLY .

For applications that cannot be changed, use the following command to obtain the previous behaviour of the open call:

# sysconfig -r cam_tape open_behaviour=0

4.3.5

Restrictions for a Dataless Environment

The Tru64 UNIX Server Extensions includes Dataless Management Services

(DMS) support for installing and operating systems in a dataless configuration. A server system maintains the root , /usr , and /var file systems for all client systems. The server maintains one copy of root for each client. The /usr file system is exported read-only and is shared by all clients registered to the environment. Each client has their own /var file system. Dataless clients access the file systems maintained on the server utilizing NFS.

A dataless environment should be considered in the following scenarios:

• There is a need to reduce the disk space requirements on the client systems. Local disk space is required only for swap and dump, the root , usr and var file systems are resident on the server.

• There is a need to have all software and data centrally located on the server. A dataless client is not designed to support local access to data.

Base System Software Notes 4–15

You should consider the following limitations when deciding to implement a dataless environment:

• Hardware limitation of the network – the majority of file system usage performed by any of the clients is done via NFS. This will consume network bandwidth, which, depending on the type and configuration of the network, can become exhausted as more clients are added to the environment.

• Hardware limitation on the file systems contained on the server – all clients are configured to share a /usr file system and all client specific data is contained in a /clients file system on the server. As clients are added to the dataless environment, the demands on these file systems on the server increase and may surpass the capabilities of the server.

• DMS may not be the best way to address centralized system management requirements. The use of DMS introduces added system management tasks in the server, and requires system setup and management on each client system.

• Patch management and update installation are not fully supported in a dataless environment. An installed dataless environment cannot be modified after clients have been configured. All clients must be deconfigured before any patches are applied or other changes made. When a client is deconfigured, the client specific customizations that have been made in the client’s writable file systems, such as system configuration data, will be lost.

4.3.6

Alternate Root Installation May Change Host File Dates

During an alternate root installation of base operating system subsets, such as is done using the dmu utility to set up a Dataless Management Services environment, the file access dates on some of the files in the host server’s file system may be changed to correspond to those from the subset’s file inventory. When the release installed into the alternate root is different from that installed on the host system, these changed dates appear invalid since they may be newer (or older) than the actual file dates from the host system’s installation kit.

This occurs when the pax utility is invoked by the setld utility to copy symbolic links from the kit subsets, and the symbolic links target absolute paths that correspond to actual files in the host system’s file system. The pax utility attempts to adjust the dates for the symbolic link, but the file system actually adjusts the dates for the target of the symbolic link.

The changed dates have no operational impact on the host system. The content of the affected files has not been changed. However, because the dates have changed, the behavior of utilities that examine file dates (such as the find command or archivers) may be affected.

4–16 Base System Software Notes

4.3.7

Enhanced Security

The following notes apply to the use of enhanced security features.

4.3.7.1

Distribution of Enhanced Security Profiles via NIS

The following restrictions apply to distributing enhanced security profiles via

NIS:

• Successful and unsuccessful login attempts for NIS-shared accounts require the completion of the following steps:

1. The master system’s rpc.yppasswdd

daemon must respond and update the last successful and last unsuccessful login fields in the prpasswd NIS map.

2. The NIS slave servers must answer to the yppush operation initiated from the rpc.yppasswdd

daemon. (Most successful logins do not require a yppush operation, but login failures and password changes do.)

The login process will not continue or terminate until both of these steps are completed.

The more NIS slave servers that are present in a given NIS domain, the more time rpc.yppasswdd

takes to complete these steps. Also, nearly-simultaneous login attempts are processed sequentially by the NIS master, each waiting on a possible yppush for the previous attempt to succeed. Therefore, if several simultaneous attempts arrive at once, some may timeout and require you to log in again. You can alleviate this problem to some extent by using the -p option of yppush . One way to do this is to modify the /var/yp/Makefile file and change the

YPPUSH= line. The following example allows up to 6 simultaneous transfers to NIS slave servers (the default number is 4):

YPPUSH=$(YPDIR)/yppush -p 6

• The time allowed for responses to RPC requests is only 25 seconds. The more profiles that are present in the prpasswd map, the more likely the time limit is to expire during a login attempt, causing that attempt to fail.

Simultaneous or nearly-simultaneous login attempts will fail if the NIS master server does not respond quickly enough to the pending login processes. If the total time taken on the NIS master for the following commands exceeds 25 seconds, then there will be circumstances under which only one user will succeed in logging in at a time:

# cd /var/yp

# make passwd prpasswd PRPWDPUSHONLY=1 NOPUSH=’"’

You can decrease the time required for map transfers if you use the btree format to store the maps on all of your NIS servers.

With successful logins, the rpc.yppasswdd

daemon will defer pushing

Base System Software Notes 4–17

the maps if the login notification comes from a Version 4.0D client.

Therefore, the yppush operation is only completed when an older client initiates the operation or when it is necessary to clear a failed login count.

• Sites that cannot use NIS to share prpasswd information may be able to use NFS to share the /tcb/files and /var/tcb/files directories instead. This requires you to export the directories with root access to the participating nodes (with –root=0 or

–root=client1:client2:client3 as appropriate). It also requires you to enable NFS locking to ensure that no database corruption occurs. For more information, see the exports (4) reference page.

In previous releases of the operating system, NIS slaves that were listed in the ypservers NIS map on the NIS master but that did not already have a copy of the prpasswd and prpasswd_nonsecure NIS maps may not have succeeded in transferring those maps during the yppush operation.

This problem has been fixed for Version 4.0D and higher.

4.3.7.2

Disaster Recovery

Because the user profile and tty information is now stored in database files, the previous recovery method of editing the files while in single-user mode is no longer available. However, as long as the /usr (and, if separate, /var ) file systems are mounted, you can use the edauth utility in single-user mode to edit extended profiles and ttys database entries.

If the /etc/passwd file is somehow lost, but the extended profiles are still available, then you can use a command sequence as in the following example to recover some of the missing data (the "\" characters indicate line continuation):

# bcheckrc

# /tcb/bin/convuser -dn | /usr/bin/xargs /tcb/bin/edauth -g | \ sed ’/:u_id#/!d;s/.*:u_name=//;s/:u_id#/:*:/;s/:u_.*$/:/’ \

>psw.missing

This will create a psw.missing

file containing entries like the following: root:*:0:

Primary group information, finger information, home directory, and login shell are not recorded in the extended profile. You must recover the data for those fields by other means.

4.3.7.3

The pw_id_map and gr_id_map Files Are Obsolete

The Enhanced Security routines pw_idtoname , pw_nametoid , gr_idtoname , and gr_nametoid (described in pw_mapping (3)) previously used the /etc/auth/system/pw_id_map and

/etc/auth/system/gr_id_map files to find the required information for mapping names to numeric identifiers, and vice versa. The disk space

4–18 Base System Software Notes

required by those files imposed a limit on how many accounts a system could support.

The Enhanced Security routines no longer use the pw_id_map and gr_id_map files. If you are running Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0D or later and still have those files, it is recommended that you remove them to recover the space occupied on the root paritition.

4.3.7.4

Behavior of useradd, usermod, and userdel Commands

The useradd command correctly honors the default administrative lock value found in the /.sysman/Account_defaults file . If

Account_defaults does not exist, the internal default for useradd is to create locked accounts. Use the administrative_lock_applied extended command line option to override the default. In the following example, useradd creates a locked account for foo regardless of the default value for administrative lock: useradd -x administrative_lock_applied=1 foo

For base security, a locked account has the text Nologin in the password field in the /etc/passwd file. If an account is unlocked and has no password, that account has no value in the password field. The account is open and accessible to anyone. A warning is displayed if an unlocked account with no password is created.

For enhanced security, all accounts have an asterisk ( * ) in the password field in /etc/passwd , but the lock flag in the protected password database is correctly set to reflect the lock status. As with base security, an unlocked account with no password is accessible to anyone.

The usermod command correctly sets the lock flags for enhanced security when the administrative_lock_applied option is given on the command line. If usermod is used to unlock a locked account with no password, a warning is displayed.

The userdel command will retire, instead of remove, accounts on a system running enhanced security.

4.3.8

Enabling Extended UIDs in the Kernel

By default, extended UIDs are not enabled in the kernel. To enable this feature, use sysconfig or the dxkerneltuner interface to set the value of the variable enable_extended_uids to 1 (enabled).

If you choose to do this, please note the following:

• While enable_extended_uids can be set dynamically, you cannot disable it dynamically. To disable enable_extended_uids , set the boot time value to 0 (disabled) and reboot your system.

Base System Software Notes 4–19

• If you cannot easily reboot your system, note that enabling extended

UIDs has very little impact on overall system performance.

4.3.9

Insight Manager Agents

Insight Manager Agents for Tru64 UNIX include SNMP-based subagents and

Web Based Enterprise Management (WBEM) capabilities to present SNMP data in a format viewable by a Web browser. It provides a rich view of the data using HTML 2.0 and JavaScript in the form of Web pages.

4.3.9.1

Installation

Insight Manager is installed automatically when you install the operating system’s mandatory subsets. They are OSFCLINET440 , which includes the

Compaq Mibs and SNMP subagent, and OSFIMXE440 , which includes the

Insight Manager subagents. For further information on these subsets, see the

Installation Guide.

4.3.9.2

Starting and Stopping the Insight Manager Daemons

The Insight Manager daemons are started as part of the init 3 startup process. The Compaq SNMP subagent ( /usr/sbin/cpq_mibs ) is initialized and started or stopped as part of the snmpd startup script:

# /sbin/init.d/snmpd start or

# /sbin/init.d/snmpd stop

The WBEM daemon is started and stopped from a new script called insightd :

# /sbin/init.d/insightd start or

# /sbin/init.d/insightd stop

4.3.9.3

How to Monitor the Tru64 UNIX Managed System

The Compaq Insight Manager Agents provide access to device management data over the industry-standard HTTP protocol. This lets you view management data from a Web browser, either locally or remotely.

Use the following URL to view data locally: http://127.0.0.1:2301/

Use this URL if localhost is configured: http://localhost:2301/

4–20 Base System Software Notes

Use this URL to view data remotely: http://machine:2301/

In this example, machine is the IP address or host name under DNS.

The Insight Manager Device home page provides a single service icon entry called Compaq Insight Management Agents. Clicking on this icon displays the device pages of the target system. The home page also presents three hyperlinks:

• Refresh

• Options

• Devices

The Options link provides various Agent configuration options.

The Devices link provides auto-discovery of other Insight Manager Agents and Insight Manager XE Servers running on the local network, allowing direct access to their 2301 ports.

The Compaq Insight Manager Agents page consists of three frames, as follows.

The upper left frame displays a conditions legend and the following links:

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Description

Agent Help

Summary

Device Home

Options

Use this link for online help.

Use this link to navigate back to the Summary Page.

Use this link to return to the Device home page.

Use this link to navigate to the Options Page and set options

The lower left frame is a navigational frame that provides links to various system components grouped under Configuration, Mass Storage, NIC

(Networking), Utilization, and Recovery. Clicking on the system component links displays component-specific data in the main pane window.

Not all the components are instrumented in this first release of the Insight

Manager Agents; more will be made available in future releases. The following table shows data availability in Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F.

Configuration

System Info

System Board

Software Version Info

Yes

Yes

N/A

Base System Software Notes 4–21

Mass Storage

File System Space Usage

Diskette Drives

Yes

Yes

SCSI Controllers Yes

Device Information Yes

Device Statistics

Bus Information

N/A

N/A

NIC

Virtual NIC

Network Controllers

N/A

N/A

Utilization

File System Utilization

Recovery

Reboot

Power On Messages

Environment

Power Supply

Yes

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Note

CPU Cache and Memory module information are available only in AlphaServers supporting FRU V4 configuration tables, specifically: AlphaServers 1000, 1200, 4100, and 8400.

4.3.9.4

Browser Requirements and Security

The minimum browser requirements include support for tables, frames, Java,

JavaScript, and the Java Development Kit (JDK) 1.1. Additional browsers, or the browsers mentioned, used with different operating systems, might not work correctly, depending upon their specific implementations of the required browser technologies.

The requirements are TCP/IP and one of the following browsers:

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Browser Requirements

Windows 95/98 or NT Version 3.51/4.0

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F and higher

Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0

Version 4.72.2106.8 or above

Netscape Navigator Version 4.04

or above

Netscape Communicator 4.5 or higher

4–22 Base System Software Notes

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Browser Requirements

DIGITAL UNIX Version 3.2C and higher Netscape Communicator 4.06 or

Important: You must turn on the following options so that the Server Agents work properly:

Enable Java

Enable JavaScript

Accept all cookies or

Accept cookies originating from the same server as the page being viewed

4.3.9.5

Security Access

In this release, you can access anonymously the device web page without logging in. If needed, the Insight Manager administrator can set user privileges.

There are only three predefined users (user, operator, and administrator) and passwords.

There are three types of data: Default (read only), Sets (read/write), and

Reboot (read/write). The WEBAGENT.INI

configuration file specifies the level of user that has access to data.

Refer to the Agent Help link in the online help for further information on setting security and on the default user, operator, and adminsitrator passwords.

To change the default passwords:

1. Navigate to the Device home page.

2. Click on the anonymous link in the text:

Login Account: anonymous.

The Account Login page is displayed.

3. Click on the changed link in the text:

The Password for a login account may be changed at any time by an Account Administrator.

Another Account Login page is displayed. This page gives the appropriate instructions.

In this release, the Web-enabled Compaq Server Management Agents do not provide SNMP sets for system parameters, or reboot capability.

Base System Software Notes 4–23

In Tru64 UNIX, the user access configuration file is located in

/usr/share/sysman/web/im/webagent/WEBAGENT.INI

. In a dataless environment, you will need to copy that file to the local directory

/var/im/webagent if you need to change its configuration setting.

4.3.9.6

Known Problems

The following problems exist in current version of the Insight Manager:

• Contrary to the message presented on the initial web page

( http://machine:2301 ), this version of Insight Manager does not generate traps. Thus, alerts are not generated.

• The Insight Manager Device Discovery web page

( http://machine:2301/cpqdev.htm

) may show inconsistent or incorrect data on some platforms, as active discovery is not fully functional.

• On some browsers, the login dialog box, which consists of text fields for

Name and Password, opens with the initial focus on the Password text field.

• The information displayed in the Capacity field for disks described in the

Mass Storage web pages is calculated as block size * 1,000,000. This will be changed to the defined calculation of block size * 1,048,576 in a future release.

• The Insight Manager AutoRefresh option, when set for less than 60 seconds, might stop refreshing web pages when run from a NetScape browser running on Tru64 UNIX.

• The Expansion Bus information displayed on the Insight Manager System

Information web page may be incorrect or incomplete. For example, on systems where both ISA and PCI buses exist, only ISA is displayed.

• The Insight Manager is not supported on the DEC 7000 systems. The cpq_mibs daemon will fail to initialize on this platform. This problem will be fixed in the first available patch kit.

4.3.10

Startup Messages Lost in Large Configurations

On systems which display a large number of console messages at system initialization (typically, systems configured with a large number of devices), some of the messages may be missing from the /var/adm/messages file.

This problem can be corrected by increasing the size of the kernel’s message buffer.

Use either of the following procedures to change the buffer size. You must be root to make the change.

4–24 Base System Software Notes

To change the buffer size using graphical administration tools, use the following steps:

1. Start the dxkerneltuner application.

2. Select the generic subsystem.

3. Set the Boot Time Value entry for the msgbuf_size attribute to the new value.

4. Apply the change before exiting.

To change the buffer size from the command line, use the following steps:

1. Create a temporary file, /tmp/msgbufsize , containing the following lines, but replacing the 32768 with the size appropriate to your system: generic: msgbuf_size = 32768

2. Enter the following command:

% sysconfigdb -f /tmp/msgbufsize -m

If a different entry was already present in the database, sysconfigdb will display a warning message to advise you of the change in size.

The increase will take effect at the next system reboot. After rebooting, you can verify the change by entering the following command:

% sysconfig -q generic | grep msgbuf_size

Note

The default size of the message buffer is 4 KB, and the example above sets it to 32 KB. Since the space used by the buffer is not returned for general use after initialization, you should set the size only high enough to correct the problem.

4.3.11

Incoming Remote Print Jobs Disable Queue If They Create spooldir Lock File

A print job to a Version 4.0F system (from any other version of Tru64

UNIX) might cause the print queue on the receiving system to become disabled.

This occurs when the lock file is not present in the spool directory for the queue when the remote host receives the job. This condition exists if the print queue was newly created, or if the contents of the spool directory were manually purged (which would delete the lock file).

When a remote job is received, the print daemon creates a lock file with a protection mode that signifies that the queue is disabled. The initial job

Base System Software Notes 4–25

completes, but any subsequent jobs submitted to the same queue do not print because the queue is in the disabled state. When the queue is disabled by this condition, the protection modes on the spool directory lock file are displayed by the ls -l command as:

-rwxr-xr--

Normally the lock file should have these protection modes set:

-rw-r--r--

To restart the queue, enter the lpc up queuename command, to clear the disabled condition and restart the queue.

To avoid the problem, create the lock file by submitting any job on the local host to the queue, or by entering the following command:

# touch spooldirpathlock

4.3.12

The lpstat Command Fails

The lpstat command fails if the PRINTER environment variable is not set and the command is issued with the following syntax:

# lpstat -u username

The command fails with the following message: lpstat: lp: unknown printer

If the PRINTER variable is set, the command returns queue information for the queue specified by PRINTER .

4.3.13

The Alias Name Field Is Empty in the Disk Configuration

The Disk Configuration application creates the correct ls /dev/alias files. It should also show the alias in the Alias Name: field in the Disk

Configuration: Configure Partitions box after naming it in the previous session, but it does not. Use the ls /dev/alias[a - h] command to verify and use the disk alias.

4.3.14

Problems when Trying to Mount DVD–ROM

The preliminary support for the native DVD file system in Version 4.0F, called DVDFS, is not fully functional. Attempts to invoke the DVDFS file system result in an error message of function not supported .

When mounting DVD media that contains an ISO-9660 directory structure

(which may be present on DVD–ROM disks formatted according to ECMA-

167 that include the bridge format), any attempts to mount specifying -t dvdfs will use the CDFS file system ( -t cdfs ) automatically. When the on-disk format does not contain an ISO-9660 directory structure, this mount

4–26 Base System Software Notes

will fail. Only DVD–ROM disks that include an ISO-9660 directory structure are supported in Version 4.0F.

For both CD–ROM media and DVD–ROM media that contains an ISO-9660 directory structure, Compaq recommends use of the -t cdfs option, as well as the -o noversion or -o rrip option where appropriate. Refer to mount (8) for a description of these options.

4.4 Network and Communications

The following notes apply to network and communications software.

4.4.1

IP Switching over ATM

The following restrictions apply when using IP switching over ATM:

• Do not use the atmsig command to start UNI signaling on a driver used for IP switching.

• Automatic startup of IP switching at boot time is not yet supported. For this release, you must configure IP switching interfaces in the

/etc/atm.conf

file, and not through the atmsetup utility.

4.4.2

Changes to ATM syslog Messages

In Version 4.0F, many syslog messages for routine ATM events are not displayed by default. The messages which show the duration of virtual connections (VC accounting messages) must be explicitly enabled.

The general verbosity of ATM messages can be controlled by setting the global_message_level parameter associated with the atm module in the sysconfigtab file. For example: sysconfig -r atm global_message_level=2

Values for this parameter are:

• 0 – Normal level. Most routine or transient events are suppressed.

• 1 – Informational level. Adds messages for normal VC release and other state changes.

• 2 – Verbose level. Provides detailed tracing of most events and state changes.

Message levels can be set for individual ATM components to tailor the amount of information displayed. Refer to sys_attrs_atm (5) for more information.

Base System Software Notes 4–27

4.4.3

Edit the /etc/hosts File After Running netsetup

In Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F, once you configure your interfaces using netsetup, view the /etc/hosts file and make sure that the hostname and the IP address of your system has been added to this file. If not, then you need to add this information in the /etc/hosts file. Edit the

/etc/hosts file as a root, and add the following line:

<system’s ip address> <system’s hostname> <any aliases for the system>

Example:

16.60.266.6

where: example.domain.com

example example-alias2

16.60.266.6

= IP address of your system.

example.domain.com

= fully qualified hostname of your system.

example , example-alias2 = aliases for your system.

Refer to the hosts (4) reference page for further information regarding the

/etc/hosts file.

4.4.4

CDE’s Static Dependency on the Network

The Common Desktop Environment (CDE) provides facilities and features for applications to communicate in a networked environment. After the network is configured and enabled, these features become available each time a new desktop session is started. After a desktop session has started, the current session has a static dependency on the state of the network configuration. Network and system administrators should be very cautious about dynamic changes to the network configuration while in a networkaware desktop session.

Prior to making any dynamic network changes, such as changing the state of your network adapter to off or changing your primary network address, add the following entry to the /.dtprofile

file: export DTNONETWORK=true

The system administrator must then log out and back in as root for the change to take effect. This change removes the dependency on the state of the network. Failure to do this may result in a session hanging after clicking on a CDE icon, such as the screen lock or Exit icons.

After all network changes are completed, remove the export

DTNONETWORK=true entry from the /.dtprofile

file.

4–28 Base System Software Notes

4.4.5

Support for NetRAIN Network Interface

Tru64 UNIX now provides support for detecting the physical loss of network connectivity, and subsequent automatic switchover to a working network interface. This feature is called Redundant Array of Independent Network adapters (NetRAIN).

NetRAIN uses two or more network interfaces to provide redundancy.

Although only one interface at a time is actually used for communication, all interfaces are monitored to ensure that traffic is flowing on each. If the interface currently being used should suffer a loss of connectivity, NetRAIN will switch network traffic to the next working interface. All the context of the previous interface is maintained: hardware address, multicast addresses, and so on.

NetRAIN is configured through extensions to the ifconfig command. It also features a programming interface via ioctl() for manual program control.

NetRAIN supports the following network adapters:

• DE435 (PCI/Ethernet)

• DE500-XA (PCI/Fast Ethernet)

• DE500-AA (PCI/Fast

• DE504-AA (Four-port/Fast Ethernet)

• DE500-BA (PCI/Fast Ethernet)

• DEFEA (EISA/FDDI)

• DEFPA (PCI/FDDI)

• DE422 (EISA/Lance Ethernet)

• DE425 (EISA/Ethernet)

• DEMFA (XMI/FDDI)

• DEMNA (XMI/Ethernet)

• ATM Emulated LAN (ELAN) interface (any supported ATM adapter)

TruCluster Software users should consult the Software Product Descriptions

(SPDs) for TruCluster Software for a list of network interfaces supported by that product.

For more details about NetRAIN, see the Network Administration guide and the nr (7) and ifconfig (8) reference pages.

Base System Software Notes 4–29

4.4.6

NetRAIN Interface Configuration Change

The method for configuring a NetRAIN interface will be improved in a future release of the operating system. If you configure a NetRAIN set in Version

4.0F, or did so in a previous releases of the operating system, you will need migrate your set to the new configuration at that time.

4.4.7

Network Services Fail to Start with NetRAIN Interface

If you configure a NetRAIN set in the inet.local

file as documented in the Network Administration guide, and the NetRAIN interface is the only network interface configured on your system, network services will fail to start automatically at boot time. To work around this problem, configure your NetRAIN interface in the rc.config

file as follows:

1. Log in as root.

2. If you have already configured NetRAIN, remove the ifconfig line in the inet.local

file that starts the NetRAIN interface. It should look similar to the following: ifconfig nr0 18.240.32.40 netmask 255.255.255.0 add fta0,fta1

3. Set the adapter name for the NetRAIN interface you are configuring.

Using the parameters from the previous step, you would enter the following command:

# rcmgr set NETDEV_0 nr0

4. Enter the following command to set the ifconfig parameters that are used to initialize the NetRAIN interface (the "\" character indicates line continuation):

# rcmgr set IFCONFIG_0 nr0 18.240.32.40 netmask \

255.255.255.0 add fta0,fta1

5. Enter the following command to indicate to the system that you have configured a network interface:

# rcmgr set NUM_NETCONFIG=1

Note that network services will not start if NUM_NETCONFIG is set to 0.

6. Restart network services to effect the changes.

If you need to deconfigure the interface for any reason, use the rcmgr utility to delete the appropriate NETDEV_0 and IFCONFIG_0 entries and update the NUM_NETCONFIG variable to 0. Then reboot your system. See the rcmgr (8) reference page for more information.

If you plan to add a non-NetRAIN interface to your system in the future, you will need to deconfigure the NetRAIN set in the rc.config

file and reconfigure it in the inet.local

file as documented in the Network

4–30 Base System Software Notes

Administration guide. If you do not make this change before adding the new interface, the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) Network Configuration application ( netconfig ) and the netsetup utility might yield unpredicable results.

This problem will be addressed in a future release of the operating system. If you configure a NetRAIN set, you will need to migrate your set to a new configuration at that time.

4.4.8

LAT and NetRAIN

By default, the latsetup utility attempts to configure LAT for operation over all network interfaces on a system.

If you have configured a NetRAIN virtual interface on your system, and the latsetup utility attempts to run LAT over any of the physical network adapters that comprise the NetRAIN set, the latstartup command will hang.

To prevent this problem, configure LAT to run over specific network interfaces on the system as documented in Section 5.7 of the Network

Administration guide. Run LAT over an interface that is not part of the

NetRAIN set.

4.4.9

NetRAIN and Microsoft Windows NT Clients

While using the default NetRAIN settings on a Tru64 UNIX server,

Microsoft Windows NT clients reset their TCP/IP connections before the server is able to complete the failover to another interface. There are two possible solutions:

• For environments with a few Windows NT clients, you can modify the

TcpTimedWaitDelay and TcpMaxDataRetransmissions NT

TCP parameters as follows:

TcpTimedWaitDelay= 30//The maximum retransmission timer.

TcpMaxDataRetransmissions=20//The maximum number of retransmissions.

• For environments with many Windows NT clients, it is more easier to modify two NetRAIN kernel attributes on the server instead of modifying the TCP retry timing parameter on each client system. On the Tru64

UNIX server system, modify the nr_max_retries and netrain_timeout kernel attributes using the sysconfig -r command or dxkerneltuner . For example, you can set the attributes

Base System Software Notes 4–31

as follows: nr_max_retries=1 //The default is 4 netrain_timeout=100 //The default is 1000

Alternatively, you can set the nrmaxretry and nrtmoisr values, respectively, when you issue the ifconfig command to create the

NetRAIN set.

See sys_attrs_netrain (5) and ifconfig (8) for information on

NetRAIN parameters.

Regardless of the solution you choose, if the host system’s network interface cards (NICs) are connected to a layer 2 switch or bridge that is running a

Spanning Tree algorithm, the Spanning Tree configuration parameters on the switch/bridge might dictate the failover time. In this case, the actual behavior of the TCP retry might depend on the switch implementation and configuration. See the documentation accompanying the switch/bridge for information.

4.4.10

Sender Address Problem When Using DECnet Mail

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F includes a new version of the sendmail application, which includes the ability to specify an owner for a mail alias, which can cause the identity of the sender on the mailer command line to be different from the identity of the sender in the From: header line. The end result is that the recipient of the mail might see the wrong address identified as the sender of the message.

If this problem occurs, the corrective action is to create a file,

/var/dna/defaults/Dnetrc.defaults

, containing the following lines: mail11.SenderFromHeader: on mail11.FromLineToUse: From

The Dnetrc.defaults

file is a configuration file read by the mail11 mailer. The specified options tell mail11 to take the sender id from the header lines, and specifically to get it from the From: line.

After you create the Dnetrc.defaults

file, obtain the latest version of mail11v3 and replace the current version in the /usr/sbin directory.

The mail11v3 mailer understands the option specified and uses the appropriate sender id.

4.4.11

DHCP Database Migration (joind and bootpd)

Starting with Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F, DHCP database files are stored in an entirely new format that is incompatible with older formats. The operating system ships with an online document, provided by JOIN Systems, that explains the reasons behind this change, lists the files that are affected,

4–32 Base System Software Notes

and provides instructions for converting the files to the new format. The document and conversion utility, README-DB237 and conv185-237 , respectively, are located in the /etc/join directory.

4.4.12

TCP Timestamp and Selective Acknowledgement Support

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F includes support for the TCP Selective

Acknowledgment Options (SACK) as well as the TCP Timestamp and

PAWS (Protect Against Wrapped Sequence Numbers) options. These TCP options can help improve TCP performance over unreliable networks. RFC

2018 TCP Selective Acknowledgment Options describes the SACK options.

RFC 1323 TCP Extensions for High Performance describes both the

Timestamp and PAWS option.

4.4.13

Latent Support for Multiple Network Adapters in a Subnet

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F provides latent support for a single system to have multiple network adapters in the same subnet; for example, tu0 configured with IP address 192.24.156.20 and tu1 configured with IP address

192.24.156.21, both with the same netmask. Previous versions require each network adapter to be in a separate physical subnet.

On connection establishment, the kernel chooses the interface that has the fewest number of connections. This connection-balancing effect could lead to greater throughput than on a system with just one network adapter per subnet.

You should use this feature only if both of the following configuration situations are true:

• The underlying network topology is switched, and it is of type Ethernet or FDDI.

• You are not running a routing daemon.

The feature might affect the operation of network software or, for example:

• Multicast transmission might not work properly.

• Utilities such as traceroute might give varied output, since the interface used might change from packet to packet.

To enable this feature, you must use dbx on the kernel and set the routemode variable to 1. You must patch the kernel for this to persist

Base System Software Notes 4–33

accross a reboot, for example:

# dbx -k /vmunix /dev/mem

(dbx) assign routemode=1

(dbx) patch routemode=1

(to set)

(to patch)

The dependence on this kernel variable will be removed, and the behavior of this feature may change in a future release.

For more details about dbx , see the Kernel Debugging guide and the

Programmer’s Guide.

For more details about adding and viewing routes, see the route (8) and netstat (1) reference pages, respectively.

4.5 Local Area Transport

The following notes apply to Local Area Transport (LAT).

4.5.1

Duplicate Minor Numbers and latsetup

The latsetup utility sometimes creates devices with duplicate minor numbers. If you manually create LAT BSD devices that do not match the valid BSD tty name space convention, latsetup can create devices with duplicate minor numbers. For example, creating device tty0 with a minor number 2 instead of 1 can cause this problem.

4.5.2

CTRL/A Causes LAT tty to Change the Case of Characters

When a CTRL/A character is typed during a LAT tty session, all lowercase characters are converted to uppercase. Another CTRL/A changes the mode back to normal.

4.5.3

Simultaneous llogin Connections

When doing a number of simultaneous llogin connections, you should use llogin with the -p option. To speed up an llogin connection, add the target host name as a reserved service.

4.5.4

LAT Interactions with NetRAIN

See Section 4.4.8 for information on LAT interactions with NetRAIN.

4.6 File Systems

The notes in this section apply to file systems.

4–34 Base System Software Notes

4.6.1

The newfs Command No Longer Searches disktab File

Starting with Version 4.0D, the newfs command no longer searches the

/etc/disktab file for hard disk geometry information. It now performs an ioctl GETDEVGEOM call to determine the characteristics of a disk.

4.6.2

Using ACLs over NFS

For an NFS client to make direct use of ACLs or extended attributes

(property lists) over NFS, you must be enable the proplistd daemon on an NFS server. You also must use the proplist mount option when mounting on the client. Access checks are enforced by the server in any case, although NFSv2 client caching could sometimes cause inappropriate read access to be granted. Correctly implemented NFSv3 clients make the necessary access checks.

Start the proplistd daemon by selecting the number of proplist daemons to run when you use the nfssetup utility. You can also use the proplistd command to start the daemon manually:

# /usr/sbin/proplistd 4

On the client, the file system must be mounted with the proplist option by either of the following methods:

• Add proplist to the options field in the /etc/fstab file: sware1:/advfs /nfs_advfs nfs rw,proplist 0 0

• Add the option to the mount command as follows:

# mount -o proplist sware1:/advfs /nfs_advfs

See the acl (4), fstab (4), proplist (4), mount (8), nfssetup (8), and proplistd (8) reference pages for more information. Note that the proplist option is not documented in mount (8).

4.6.3

ACL Size Limitations

On AdvFS file systems there is a hard limit of 1560 bytes for a property list entry. Since Access Control Lists (ACLs) are stored in property list entries, this equates to 62 ACL entries in addition to the three required ACL entries.

The EINVAL error is returned if you attempt to exceed this limit.

To facilitate interoperation of the UFS and AdvFS ACLs, a configurable limit has been imposed on UFS ACLs. The default value of the UFS limit is 1548 bytes, equivalent to the 65-entry limit on AdvFS. The UFS configurable limit on ACLs has been added to the sec subsystem and has been given the attribute name ufs-sec-proplist-max-entry . You can use the sysconfig utility to dynamically configure the attribute or you can use sysconfigdb or dxkerneltuner to statically configure the attribute in

Base System Software Notes 4–35

the /etc/sysconfigtab file.

A configurable property list element size for UFS has also been added to the sec subsystem and has been given the attribute name ufs-proplistmax-entry . The value of ufs-proplist-max-entry must be larger than ufs-sec-proplist-max-entry by enough space to hold a property list element header. The sysconfig utility adjusts the ufsproplist-max-entry attribute automatically. The default value of ufs-proplist-max-entry is 8192 bytes.

See the cfgmgr (8), seconfig (8), seconfigdb (8), sysconfig (8), and sysconfigdb (8) reference pages for more information.

4.6.4

Advanced File System (AdvFS)

The following notes discuss features, problems, and restrictions of the

Advanced File System (AdvFS).

4.6.4.1

AdvFS and fsync()

You can use the fsync() system call to synchronously write dirty file data to disk. There are two ways a file can have dirty data in memory. One way is via the write() system call. The other is from a memory write reference after an mmap() system call. For AdvFS files, the fsync() system call writes out dirty data only from the write() system call. If dirty data from an mmap() also needs to be written then you must also use the msync() system call.

4.6.4.2

Reusing AdvFS Partitions

You can reuse a partition that was previously part of an AdvFS domain.

However, before you reuse the partition, you must remove the domain on the partition you want to reuse. Use the rmfdmn command to remove the entire domain. After the unused domain is removed, you can create a new domain on the partition.

4.6.4.3

Disk Usage Information

Under certain conditions, the disk usage information on an AdvFS file system may become corrupted. To correct this, turn on quotas in the /etc/fstab file for the affected file system, and then run the quotacheck command on the file system. This should correct the disk usage information.

4–36 Base System Software Notes

4.6.4.4

Cleanly Unmount File Systems Before Changing Operating

System Versions

If a system crashes or goes down unexpectedly due to a loss of power or other similar circumstances, AdvFS will perform recovery the next time that the filesets that were mounted at the time of the crash are remounted after rebooting. This recovery keeps the AdvFS metadata consistent and makes use of the AdvFS log file.

Different versions of the operating system use different AdvFS log record types. Therefore, it is important that AdvFS recovery be done on the same version of the operating system that was running at the time of the crash.

For example, if your system is running Version 4.0F and the system crashes, do not reboot using Version 3.2G since that version of AdvFS may not be able to work with the log records that the Version 4.0F system put into the log.

Therefore, if you want to reboot using a different version of the operating system, make sure that any mounted AdvFS filesets are unmounted cleanly before rebooting. In addition, if the system panicked or an AdvFS domain was domain-panicked, it is best to reboot using the original version of the operating system and run the /sbin/advfs/verify command to make sure that the domain is not corrupted. If it is not, it is then safe to reboot using a different version of the operating system and remount the filesets.

4.6.4.5

Running Verify on AdvFS File Systems

Use the AdvFS verify utility ( /sbin/advfs/verify ) to check the consistency of the on-disk metadata in an AdvFS domain. This utility has been enhanced to better detect certain potential problems. Compaq recommends that you run the verify utility during your regular maintenance schedule.

You should run the verify utility when an entire AdvFS domain is scheduled to be offline, as no fileset in the domain can be mounted when you run the verify utility. If you create a cron job, ensure that it executes the appropriate commands to dismount the file systems.

You should also run the verify utility prior to doing an update installation.

4.6.4.6

The vdump Utility Requires Two kill Signals

Testing of AdvFS on a multiprocessor system showed that occasionally

(about 30 percent of the time) when a test suite was run, it would fail because vdump processes would not respond to kill -9 signals. The workaround is to send such a process a second kill -9 signal.

Base System Software Notes 4–37

4.6.4.7

Verify Fails on Dual-Mounted Domain

While running verify on a dual-mounted domain, it is possible to receive the following type of message:

Corruption in frag file type list for frag type 0

Expected to find set ID 36f68cbd.0006ae8c.1.8001 but found set ID

36f68c94.000b1b83.1.8001

This message can be ignored as it does not reflect an actual problem in the frag file, but instead an artifact of the dual-mounted domain.

4.6.4.8

Very Small AdvFS Domains Created In lockmode 4

Creation of domains smaller than 20 MB while running in lockmode 4 can cause the system to panic when the first fileset is created within the small domain. Such domains may safely be created and used if the system is not running in lockmode 4. To see which lockmode the system is running in, enter the following command:

% sysconfig -q generic lockmode

4.6.5

Logical Storage Manager

The following notes describe problems and restrictions of the Logical Storage

Manager (LSM).

4.6.5.1

LSM Sparse Plexes May Erroneously Mask an I/O Failure

Under certain hardware failure scenarios, an LSM volume configured with a sparse plex may erroneously return success to the file system or application when in fact the I/O failed. This does not occur when you do not configure volumes with sparse plexes.

4.6.5.2

Restrictions with LSM root and swap Volumes

Root, primary swap, and secondary swap volumes configured under LSM have the following restrictions:

• Root and primary swap must be on the same physical disk and you must configure them using the encapsulation tools.

• If a secondary swap volume is configured under LSM, you must configure the root and primary swap.

• You must configure the root, primary swap, and any secondary swap volumes into the disk group named rootdg .

4–38 Base System Software Notes

4.6.5.3

Possible Problems Accessing Physical Block 0 with LSM

Physical block 0 on Tru64 UNIX disks is typically write protected by default.

If a disk is added to LSM by using the voldiskadd utility, physical block

0 is skipped. However, if a partition that includes physical block 0 is encapsulated into LSM by using the volencap , vollvmencap , or voladvdomencap utility, physical block 0 is not skipped. This is not a problem because the file system software already skips block 0 and does not write to it.

A problem can occur when an LSM volume that contains a write-protected block 0 is dissolved and its disk space is reused for a new purpose. Neither the new application nor LSM know about the write-protected physical disk block 0 and a write failure can occur.

To fix this problem, use the following steps to remove the write-protected physical disk block 0 from the LSM disk before it can be assigned to the new volume:

1. Use the voldg and voldisk commands to remove the disk from LSM.

2. Use the voldiskadd command to add either a specific partition of the disk or the entire disk to LSM.

4.6.5.4

Using LSM with SWXCR-P(A/B) and SWXCR-E(A/B) RAID

Controllers

When you create an LSM mirror using a disk that is configured as Just-a-

Bunch-of-Disks (JBOD) with either the SWXCR-P or SWXCR-E RAID controllers, a disk failure requires that you reconfigure the disk on the controller. The disk is in an unusable state once it is set off line by the controller and cannot be used by LSM until it is reconfigured. Refer to the

StorageWorks RAID Array 200 Subystem Family Installation and

Configuration Guide.

4.6.5.5

Enabling LSM After Installation Requires Rebuilding the Kernel

If you use the setld utility to install LSM after you originally install Tru64

UNIX, you must rebuild the system kernel to enable LSM.

To rebuild the kernel, run the doconfig utility with no command flags.

Be sure to select all the appropriate options for your system, and be ready to edit the configuration file as needed to reimplement any changes required by your system.

Note that the doconfig menu display does not include LSM. However, the doconfig utility will build a kernel that includes LSM. Refer to the

Logical Storage Manager guide for more information.

Base System Software Notes 4–39

4.6.5.6

The volrootmir Script Supports Only LUN 0 on HSZ

Only LUN 0 is supported as a boot device by the console. Hence, you can only mirror the LSM rootvol and swapvol volumes to LUN 0 in an

HSZ . Therefore, when you use the volrootmir script to mirror rootvol and swapvol , use only LUN 0 on an HSZ as an argument to the volrootmir script.

4.6.5.7

Using LSM rootvol Requires sysconfigtab Parameters

If you use the LSM rootvol volume for the root file system and the swapvol volume is in use as a primary swap volume, LSM adds the following entries to the /etc/sysconfigtab file to enable rootability: lsm: lsm_rootvol_is_dev=1 lsm_swapvol_is_dev=1

If these entries are deleted or if the /etc/sysconfigtab file is deleted, the system will not boot. If this happens, you can boot the system interactively as follows (the "\" character indicates line continuation):

>>> boot -fl i

Enter kernel_name option_1 ... option_n: vmunix \ lsm_rootdev_is_volume=1

Use the sysconfigdb utility to add the LSM entries as shown above to the

/etc/sysconfigtab file after the system boots. Then, reboot the system for the changes to take effect.

4.6.5.8

Error While Dissociating a Preferred LSM Plex

When using LSM, a preferred plex can not be dissociated from an active mirrored volume. Attempting to do so will cause the following error: fsgen/volplex: Unexpected kernel error in configuration update

Before dissociating the plex, change the volume’s read policy so the plex is no longer the preferred plex. For example:

# volume -g my_diskgroup rdpol round my_volume

# volplex -g my_diskgroup dis my_plex

4.6.5.9

Presto Reset and Flush Operations May Cause System Crash

Due to a problem in the presto driver, avoid using the presto reset and flush operations (using the command presto -R or presto -F ) to flush presto data. There is a possibility that the system will panic if a presto reset/flush operation is attempted. A workaround is to perform an orderly shutdown to flush all data that can be flushed and use the console command prflush –z to purge any remaining data.

4–40 Base System Software Notes

Note that reset/purge operations will destroy file system data and so should be performed only after all attempts to recover devices and data have failed.

4.6.6

Mounting Associated Products CD-ROMs on Tru64 UNIX

Versions Other Than Version 4.0F

The Associated Products CD–ROMs (APCDs) can be mounted with the mount command on Tru64 UNIX systems running Version 4.0E or later, as follows:

# mount -r /dev/rz4c /mnt

To mount the APCDs on releases prior to Version 4.0E, you must mount the

CD–ROMs with the following options:

# mount -r -t cdfs -o rrip /dev/rz4c /mnt

On versions prior to Version 4.0D you might receive the following error message indicating that CDFS support is not built in to the current running kernel:

# mount -r -t cdfs -o rrip /dev/rz4c /mnt

/dev/rz4c on /mnt: No valid filesystem exists on this partition

If you receive this error, you need to build your kernel with the following option:

ISO 9660 Compact Disc File System (CDFS)

Base System Software Notes 4–41

Development Environment Notes

This chapter contains notes about issues and known problems with the development environment software and, whenever possible, provides solutions or workarounds to those problems. The following topics are discussed:

• General programming

• Realtime programming

• DECthreads (pthreads)

• Profiling

• Debugging with dbx

• Java Programming

5.1 General Programming

The following note applies to general programming.

5.1.1

The malloc Function Is Now Tunable for Better

Multithreaded Performance

The C runtime library malloc function (and associated functions) have been modified to allow significantly better concurrency when used by multithreaded applications. Additionally, three new memory allocator tuning variables have been added to allow more control of allocator behavior:

• __first_fit

• __max_cache

• __delayed_free

As always when developing applications making significant use of dynamically allocated memory and requiring maximum speed of execution, you should carefully read the Tuning Memory Allocation section of the malloc (3) reference page.

5.1.2

New DEC C Default Tuning Could Impact Applications That

Directly Map I/O Space

Applications that directly map and access I/O space with bytes or shorts may be impacted by the new DEC C compiler.

The default tuning for the DEC C compiler has advanced its focus from

EV4-EV5 architectures to EV56-EV6 architectures. With this change in tuning, the compiler now generates amask-guarded byte and word instruction sequences for some loops. The amask guards assure that the byte and word instructions will not execute on processors that do not support them. Less efficient instructions will execute instead.

The net result of this change is that users who recompile their applications with the default tuning may see a slight increase in object code size, a very slight decrease in performance on EV4-EV5 processors, and a sizable increase in performance on EV56-EV6 machines.

This change may be disruptive for applications that use special device driver interfaces that directly map I/O space for devices that do not support 8-bit and 16-bit access granularity.

If those applications are compiled without –Wf , –static and are run on

EV56-EV6 machines they may corrupt I/O memory. To avoid this possibility, those applications should be compiled with –tune ev5 which disables byte/word instruction generation.

5.2 Realtime Programming

The following notes apply to realtime programming.

5.2.1

SA_SIGINFO Not Visible Under Certain Namespace

Conditions

The symbol SA_SIGINFO , defined in sys/signal.h

, is not visible under certain namespace conditions when _POSIX_C_SOURCE is explicitly defined in the application or on the compile line.

The SA_SIGINFO symbol is visible if you do not explicitly define

_POSIX_C_SOURCE.

For most applications, unistd.h

provides the standards definitions needed, including _POSIX_C_SOURCE . As a general rule, avoid explicitly defining standards macros in your application or on the compile line. If you do explicitly define _POSIX_C_SOURCE , then

SA_SIGINFO is visible if you also explicitly define _OSF_SOURCE .

5–2 Development Environment Notes

5.2.2

POSIX 1003.1b Synchronized I/O and File Truncation

POSIX 1003.1b synchronized I/O using file status flags does not apply to file truncation. When file status flags are used to control I/O synchronization, no synchronization occurs for file truncation operations.

You can use the fsync() or fdatasync() function to explicitly synchronize truncation operations.

5.2.3

The fcntl() Function and F_GETFL with O_DSYNC File

Status

A problem occurs when fcntl() is called with the F_GETFL request, and the file operated on has the O_DSYNC file status flag set. The return mask incorrectly indicates O_SYNC instead of O_DSYNC .

5.3 DECthreads (pthreads)

The following notes apply to DECthreads. See Section 8.10 and Section

8.11 for information about DECthreads interfaces that will be retired in a future release. See Section 1.11 for information about Visual Threads, a new product that lets you analyze your multithreaded applications for potential logic and performance problems.

5.3.1

Static Libraries

Users who desire optimal performance from DECthreads, and who are willing to relink on future versions of Tru64 UNIX, might want to use the

DECthreads static libraries that are located in the CMPDEVENH440 subset.

Once this subset is installed, you can find the libraries in the

/usr/opt/alt/usr/lib/threads directory.

Before using these static libraries, you should read the README file in the same location.

5.3.2

Signal Handling

Signal handling in the POSIX 1003.1c ( pthread ) interface of DECthreads is substantially different from signal handling for the draft 4 POSIX and the

CMA interfaces of DECthreads. When migrating your application from the draft 4 POSIX or CMA interfaces to the POSIX 1003.1c interface, please see the IEEE POSIX 1003.1c standard or the Guide to DECthreads for a discussion of signal handling in threaded applications.

Development Environment Notes 5–3

5.3.3

Scheduling Behavior (Contention Scope)

In releases prior to Version 4.0, thread scheduling attributes were systemwide. In other words, threads had a system contention scope. Since

Version 4.0, thread policies and priorities are, by default, local to the process.

No artificial limit exists for thread priorities of these process contention scope threads, the full priority range is accessible by every thread.

Previously, there was no way to control the contention scope of a thread.

Starting with Version 4.0D, applications coded to the POSIX 1003.1c

pthreads interface can set the desired contention scope upon thread creation.

For more information on setting and determining thread contention scope, see the descriptions of the following routines in the Guide to DECthreads: pthread_attr_setscope() pthread_attr_getscope()

The guide also describes a problem with inheritance of the contention scope scheduling attribute in Versions 4.0D and higher.

Process contention scope threads provide faster context switches between threads in the same process, and reduce the demand on system resources without reducing execution concurrency. The Tru64 UNIX "two level scheduling" implementation (the code that supports process contention scope scheduling) automatically replaces kernel execution entities when a process contention scope thread blocks in the kernel for any reason, and it provides time-slicing of compute-bound threads. Therefore, there is no need to worry that using process contention scope will reduce parallelism or allow the execution of some threads to prevent other threads from executing.

The only code that should require system contention scope is code that must run on a specific processor via binding and code that must be directly scheduled by the operating system kernel against threads in other processes, particularly threads running inside the kernel. While the scheduling policy and priority of process contention scope threads is virtual and affects scheduling only against other threads within the process, the scheduling policy and priority of system contention scope threads (when the process runs with root access) can allow the thread to preempt threads within the kernel.

While this can sometimes be valuable and even essential, extreme care must be used in such programs to avoid locking up the system. It might be impossible to interrupt such a thread.

5.3.4

Problems Using of the stackaddr Thread Creation Attribute

Compaq does not recommend using the stackaddr thread creation attribute which allows you to allocate your own stack for a thread. The semantics of this attribute are poorly defined by POSIX and the Single UNIX

Specification, Version 2. As a result, code using the attribute is unlikely to be portable between implementations. The attribute is difficult to use reliably,

5–4 Development Environment Notes

since the developer must, by intimate knowledge of the machine architecture and implementation, know the correct address to specify relative to the allocated stack. The implementation cannot diagnose an incorrect value because the interface does not provide sufficient information. Using an incorrect value might result in program failure, possibly in obscure ways.

5.3.5

DECthreads Read-Write Locks

DECthreads now supports read-write locks. A read-write lock is a synchronization object for protecting a data object that can be accessed concurrently by more than one thread in the same program. Unlike a mutex, a read-write lock distinguishes between shared read and exclusive write operations on the shared data object. A read-write lock is most useful in protecting a shared data object that is read frequently and modified less frequently. The following routines provide access to the read-write lock capability:

• pthread_rwlockattr_destroy (3)

• pthread_rwlockattr_init (3)

• pthread_rwlock_destroy (3)

• pthread_rwlock_init (3)

• pthread_rwlock-rdlock (3)

• pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock (3)

• pthread_rwlock_trywrlock (3)

• pthread_rwlock_unlock (3)

• pthread_rwlock_wrlock (3)

For more information about read-write locks, see the reference pages for these routines.

5.3.6

DECthreads Object Naming

DECthreads now allows you to assign names, as C language strings, to thread objects including threads, mutexes, condition variables, and read-write locks (see Section 5.3.5 ). During debugging, you can use these names to help identify individual objects by function rather than by the numeric identifiers the thread library assigns. The Ladebug debugger and the Visual

Threads analysis tool (see Section 1.11 ) include these names when displaying information about thread objects. Other debuggers and analysis tools can also use the names you have assigned.

Use the following routines to assign and retrieve object names:

• pthread_attr_getname_np (3)

Development Environment Notes 5–5

• pthread_attr_setname_np (3)

• pthread_cond_getname_np (3)

• pthread_cond_setname_np (3)

• pthread_getname_np (3)

• pthread_key_getname_np (3)

• pthread_key_setname_np (3)

• pthread_mutex_getname_np (3)

• pthread_mutex_setname_np (3)

• pthread_rwlock_getname_np (3)

• pthread_rwlock_setname_np (3)

• pthread_setname_np (3)

For more information about object naming, see the reference pages for these routines.

5.3.7

DECthreads Metering Capability May Not Be Reliable in

Some Situations

In this release, the metering capabilities of DECthreads may not be reliable in a process that forks.

5.3.8

Memory Alignment Issue

Although older Alpha processors (prior to the 21264 chip) can only access memory in units of at least a quadword (8 bytes), multiple variables, each of which is less than eight bytes, can occupy the same quadword in memory. In such cases, multithreaded programs might experience a problem if two or more threads read the same quadword, update different parts of it, then independently write their respective copies back to memory. The last thread to write the quadword overwrites any data previously written to other parts of the quadword. This can happen even though each thread protects its part of the quadword with its own mutex.

The Tru64 UNIX C compiler protects scalar variables against this problem by aligning them in memory on quadword (8-byte) boundaries. However, in composite data objects such as structures or arrays, the compiler aligns members on their natural boundaries. For example, a 2-byte member is aligned on a 2-byte boundary. Because of this, any adjacent members of the composite object that total eight bytes or less could occupy the same quadword in memory.

Inspect your multithreaded application code to determine if you have a composite data object in which adjacent members could share the same

5–6 Development Environment Notes

quadword in memory. If you do and if your project allows, Compaq recommends that you force alignment of each such member variable to a quadword boundary by redefining the variable to be at least eight bytes, or by defining sufficient padding storage after the variable to total eight bytes.

Alternatively, you can create one mutex for each composite data object in which adjacent members can share the same quadword in memory. Then use this single mutex to protect all write accesses by all threads to the composite data object. This technique might be less desirable because of performance considerations.

5.3.9

DECthreads pthread_debug() and pthread_debug_cmd()

Routines

In order to allow for the possibility of a more comprehensive and robust threads debugging environment, it has become necessary to remove the pthread_debug() and pthread_debug_cmd() routines. To prevent existing binaries from failing, the routines will continue to be recognized.

However, a call to either routine now results in an immediate return to the calling program. The pthread_debug_cmd() routine returns a zero (0) indicating success. Debuggers such as Ladebug and TotalView provide functionality formerly provided by these routines.

5.3.10

DECthreads SIGEV_THREAD Notification Mechanism

The SIGEV_THREAD notification mechanism works correctly, starting in

Version 4.0D. Using this notification mechanism, a user-defined function is called to perform notification of an asynchronous event. The function is run as though it were the start routine of a thread and can make full use of the

DECthreads synchronization objects.

The SIGEV_THREAD notification mechanism and the function to be called are specified in the sigevent structure. This mechanism is useful for programming with the POSIX 1.b realtime signal interfaces such as timers and asynchronous I/O. For information and cautions concerning the use of signals in a multithreaded environment, see the Guide to DECthreads. For more information about using SIGEV_THREAD , see the IEEE POSIX

1003.1c-1996 standard and The Open Group Single UNIX Specification,

Version 2.

5.4 Profiling

The following notes apply to the profiler tools.

Development Environment Notes 5–7

5.4.1

Change to hiprof’s Profiling of Threaded Programs

The -cputime option of the hiprof (5) profiler now provides an instruction-count profile for threaded programs, the same as the -calltime option, because the CPU cycles reported for kernel-threads by the RPCC instruction can not be mapped to pthread (3) threads.

The only significant difference is that the profile is displayed as the number of instructions executed instead of CPU seconds used. The -cputime option still profiles CPU seconds for nonthreaded programs.

5.4.2

Change in Naming of Files by cc Profiling Option

The cc command’s -prof_gen option (which causes the pixie profiler to be run after the executable is linked) names files differently from the way it did in releases prior to Version 4.0E.

The new naming scheme is necessary to support formal benchmarking, which is the primary purpose of the -prof_gen option.

Before Version 4.0E, the uninstrumented executable produced by the ld linker and provided as input to pixie was named a.out

(or as indicated with the -o option). The instrumented executable produced by pixie was given the usual .pixie

filename extension.

Starting with Version 4.0E, the instrumented executable is named a.out

(or as indicated with the -o option). The uninstrumented executable is given a

.non_pixie

file name extension.

5.5 Debugging with dbx

The following note applies to debugging with dbx .

5.5.1

Examining the User Program Stack in a Kernel Crash Dump

When debugging a crash dump with dbx , you can examine the call stack of the user program whose execution precipitated the kernel crash. To examine a crash dump and also view the user program stack, you must invoke dbx using the following command syntax:

# dbx -k vmunix.n vm[z]core.n path/user-program

The version number ( n ) is determined by the value contained in the bounds file, which is located in the same directory as the dump files. The userprogram parameter specifies the user program executable.

The crash dump file must contain a full crash dump. For information on setting system defaults for full or partial crash dumps, see the System

Administration guide. You can use the assign command in dbx , as shown in the following example, to temporarily specify a full crash dump. This

5–8 Development Environment Notes

setting stays in effect until the system is rebooted.

# dbx -k vmunix.3

dbx version 5.0

.

.

.

(dbx) assign partial_dump=0

To specify a full crash dump permanently so that this setting remains in effect after a reboot, use the patch command in dbx , as shown in the following example:

(dbx) patch partial_dump=0

With either command, a partial_dump value of 1 specifies a partial dump.

The following example shows how to examine the state of a user program named test1 that purposely precipitated a kernel crash with a syscall after several recursive calls:

# dbx -k vmunix.1 vmzcore.1 /usr/proj7/test1 dbx version 5.0

Type ’help’ for help.

stopped at [boot:1890 ,0xfffffc000041ebe8] Source not available warning: Files compiled -g3: parameter values probably wrong

(dbx) where

> 0 boot() ["../../../../src/kernel/arch/alpha/machdep.c":1890,

0xfffffc000041ebe8]

1 panic(0xfffffc000051e1e0, 0x8, 0x0, 0x0, 0xffffffff888c3a38)

["../../../../src/kernel/bsd/subr_prf.c":824, 0xfffffc0000281974]

2 syscall(0x2d, 0x1, 0xffffffff888c3ce0, 0x9aa1e00000000, 0x0)

["../../../../src/kernel/arch/alpha/syscall_trap.c":593, 0xfffffc0000423be4]

3 _Xsyscall(0x8, 0x3ff8010f9f8, 0x140008130, 0xaa, 0x3ffc0097b70)

["../../../../src/kernel/arch/alpha/locore.s":1409, 0xfffffc000041b0f4]

4 __syscall(0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0) [0x3ff8010f9f4]

5 justtryme(scall = 170, cpu = 0, levels = 25) ["test1.c":14,

0x120001310]

6 recurse(inbox = (...)) ["test1.c":28, 0x1200013c4]

7 recurse(inbox = (...)) ["test1.c":30, 0x120001400]

8 recurse(inbox = (...)) ["test1.c":30, 0x120001400]

9 recurse(inbox = (...)) ["test1.c":30, 0x120001400]

.

.

.

30 recurse(inbox = (...)) ["test1.c":30, 0x120001400]

31 main(argc = 3, argv = 0x11ffffd08) ["test1.c":52, 0x120001518]

(dbx) up 8 2 recurse: 30 if (r.a[2] > 0) recurse(r);

(dbx) print r 3 struct { a = {

[0] 170

[1] 0

[2] 2

[3] 0

Development Environment Notes 5–9

.

.

.

(dbx) print r.a[511] 4

25

(dbx)

The where command displays the kernel stack followed by the user program stack at the time of the crash. In this case, the kernel stack has 4 activation levels; the user program stack starts with the fifth level and includes several recursive calls.

The up 8 command moves the debugging context 8 activation levels up the stack to one of the recursive calls within the user program code.

The print r command displays the current value of the variable r , which is a structure of array elements. Full symbolization is available for the user program, assuming it was compiled with the -g option.

The print r.a[511] command displays the current value of array element 511 of structure r .

5.6 Java Programming

The following note applies to Java programming.

5.6.1

Name Space Conflict Between Java and SVE

A file system conflict exists between Java and the System V Environment

(SVE) on Version 4.0 and later systems.

The problem arises because both Java and SVE use the file system path name string /usr/bin/alpha for different purposes. Java creates

/usr/bin/alpha as a directory. SVE (specifically, the optional

SVEBCP4** Base Compatibility Package subset) creates

/usr/bin/alpha as a symbolic link to the

/usr/opt/svr4/usr/bin/alpha directory. The order in which these applications are installed determines if the customer will experience a problem. Here are three ways to avoid the problem:

• If SVE is already installed and the /usr/bin/alpha link exists, it is safe to remove the link. The link is not used after the SVE installation and for all other situations SVE will look for the directory location,

/usr/opt/svr/usr/bin/alpha . That directory will be found and does not cause a conflict.

• If SVE has not yet been installed, Compaq recommends that SVE be installed without the Inclusive View option. If Inclusive View is not selected during SVE installation, the /usr/bin/alpha link will not be needed during SVE installation.

5–10 Development Environment Notes

• If SVE has not yet been installed and the Inclusive View option is required, follow these steps:

1. Temporarily rename the /usr/bin/alpha directory that is used by

Java

2. Install SVE

3. Remove the /usr/bin/alpha link created by the SVE installation

4. Restore the Java /usr/bin/alpha directory

There will be no patch or other resolution mechanism for this problem other than the workaround provided here.

Development Environment Notes 5–11

Window System Software Notes

This chapter contains notes about issues and known problems with the windowing software and, whenever possible, provides solutions or workarounds to those problems. The following topics are discussed in this chapter:

• Hardware notes and restrictions

• X servers

• X clients

• CDE clients

• Windows programming

• Internationalization

6.1 Hardware Notes and Restrictions

The following notes apply to graphics hardware restrictions.

6.1.1

Qvision Graphics Display Error

Different versions of Qvision graphics boards demonstrate fillsolid drawing problems, leaving a line at the bottom of the screen, which is evident when running CDE blank lock screen. The line varies in color and intensity depending on the version of the Qvision board.

6.2 X Servers

The following notes apply to X servers.

6.2.1

Limited Multiscreen Display Support with CDE

CDE provides limited support for X servers with more than one screen.

While a multiscreen environment is possible, a number of inconsistencies are noticeable. For example, colors in secondary screens may not be correct, icons may not display properly, and applications may not appear on the screen where they are invoked.

6.2.2

Do Not Modify the keymaps.dir File

The final revision of the X Keyboard Extension, XKB Version 1.0, will be different from XKB Version 0.65, shipping with this release. The format of

/usr/lib/X11/xkb/keymaps.dir

will change. Do not modify this file as it will not be preserved with future updates of the operating system.

To force the server to use a specific XKB keymap, add the -xkbmap option to the server options line in /usr/lib/X11/Xserver.conf

. Refer to the Xdec (1X) reference page on for more information.

6.3 X Clients

The following notes apply to X clients.

6.3.1

X Window Colormap Resources

Color rich applications, such as Netscape, exhaust a large number of colormap resources. This results in problems with other graphical applications. For example, you may notice that icons normally displayed by the CDE Application Manager are not displayed when a color rich application is currently running on the system. Graphics applications and online help volumes may also be affected. The icon editor, dticon , may not be able to open a pixmap that contains a large number of colors.

In most cases this is a visual problem, and it may not be necessary to take any corrective actions. You can use the CDE icon labels in the same way as the icon for user actions such as drag-and-drop, and single and double click.

The simplest solution is to exit the color rich application. There are several alternate actions:

• Use the CDE Style Manager’s Color application to select the number of colors used by the desktop or an application. Alternatively, if supported:

– Set an application resource to limit color usage.

– Start the application with a flag that controls color map installation.

(Refer to the application documentation for further details.)

• In the case of Netscape, two workarounds are available; the first is preferred:

– Use Netscape’s maxImageColors resource to limit the number of colors that Netscape uses. A suggested limit is 96. You can do this

6–2 Window System Software Notes

by placing the following line in the $HOME/.Xdefaults

file:

Netscape*maxImageColors: 96

– Start Netscape with the -install flag, which specifies that

Netscape should install its own colormap. Although this is supported, there are side affects such as:

• Noticeable application and background color changes when focus is moved in and out of the Netscape window

• Inability to clearly view the contents of the Netscape window when focus is moved out of the Netscape window

6.3.2

Old X Environment

If the XDM graphical login environment is selected instead of the default

CDE environment, you may need to install the OSFOLDX11440 subset to regain the expected user environment. If this subset is missing, the default X session will consist of a single xterm window and the twm window manager instead of the XDM session manager.

6.4 CDE Clients

The following notes apply to CDE clients.

6.4.1

Inaccessible Dialog Buttons

When running CDE with 640 x 480 graphics resolution, the OK, Apply,

Cancel, and Help buttons of some application dialogs may be inaccessible. If this happens, you can correct it by setting the DXmfitToScreenPolicy resource to as_needed in the application’s defaults file or, for systemwide problems, in the /usr/dt/config/$LANG/sys.resources

file.

6.4.2

Screen Savers Prevent Efficient Power Management

When the screen on a DPMS-capable monitor is switched to standby, suspend, or off mode, the X server continues to run the screen saver. In

CDE, where there are a number of active screen savers, this may defeat the

CPU slowdown features for power management on certain Energy Starcompliant platforms. To minimize power consumption, you should stop using active screen savers by doing any of the following steps:

• In the Screen Saver panel of the Screen dialog under the Style Manager, select "Blank Screen" and deselect any active screen savers that may be running.

Window System Software Notes 6–3

• Select the "Off" button in the same dialog box.

• Execute xset s off from a terminal client window.

6.4.3

Remote Invocation of CDE File Manager dtfile

File Manager, Application Manager, and Trash Manager are different views supported by the dtfile application. Avoid invoking dtfile from a remote system with the DISPLAY environment variable set appropriately.

This restriction is necessary because of the client-server model used by the dtfile application and its close interaction with the tooltalk messaging system.

In the event of an unexpected behaviour from any of these utilities, close down all windows associated with the File Manager, Application Manager, and Trash Manager. Then kill all processes associated with dtfile . You can get the pid for each process by using the following command:

# ps -aef | grep dtfile

6.4.4

The dtmail Application

The following notes apply to the dtmail application.

6.4.4.1

MAILLOCKING Environment Variable

The dtmail application does not honor the user configurable mail-locking environment variable, MAILLOCKING . If you are using NFS, you must have

NFS locking enabled on both client and server systems.

6.4.4.2

Tooltalk Locking Disabled by Default

The dtmail application disables tooltalk locking by default. To enable it, select the following option from the Mail Options->Advance dialog box:

Use network aware mail file locking

Alternatively, set the following option in your $HOME/.mailrc

file: cdenotooltalklock=’f’

If tooltalk locking is enabled, and the rpc.ttdbserverd

daemon is not running, you will get the following message:

Mailer is unable to obtain exclusive access to this mailbox because the system is not responding.

For this time only, you can choose to open this mailbox read-only, or to open it read-write without exclusive access (use only if no one else is using this mailbox).

6–4 Window System Software Notes

You can either quit dtmail and then start the rpc.ttdbserverd

daemon, or click on read-write, which allows you to continue without tooltalk locking.

If you are running the automount daemon, the dtmail application may not be able to access your new mail inbox and you will see a dialog box showing the following message:

Unable to access an object required to complete the operation

If you see this message, copy the contents of your current mail inbox to a temporary file as a backup and perform the following steps:

1. Check that the following line is in your .mailrc

file: set cdenotooltalklock

2. If the line is not in your .mailrc

file, edit the file to include it.

Alternatively, you can use the following method while in dtmail :

1. From the Mailbox pull down menu, select Mail Options

2. From the Mail Options dialog box, select the category Advanced.

3. From the Advanced options, click on the option named: Use network aware mail file locking. This action should remove the check mark.

4. Close all dialog boxes and restart the dtmail application. Check the contents of your current mailbox and the backup mailbox to ensure that no mail was lost during this process.

6.4.4.3

Row and Column Display

Changing the values for rows and columns in the Mail Options->Message

View will not take effect immediately when you click on OK or APPLY.

Exit dtmail and restart it again from the control panel, command line, or file manager.

6.4.4.4

Attachments Are Not Included

If you compose a mail message by selecting one of the following from the dtmail main window, attachments will not be included:

• Compose->New, Include All

• Compose->Reply to Sender, Include

• Compose->Reply to All, Include

Include the attachments manually by using the drag and drop feature.

Window System Software Notes 6–5

6.4.5

CDE’s Static Dependency on the Network

CDE has a static dependency on the state of the network configuration. For more information, see Section 4.4.4.

6.4.6

The xnlLanguage Resource Settings May Cause Problems with CDE

CDE users should remove any xnlLanguage resource settings from their

.Xdefaults

files. Those settings are typically left over from one of the user’s earlier DECwindows sessions, where the user selected a language from the session manager’s language menu and then saved that setting.

The xnlLanguage settings should be removed because they override whatever language you select from the language menu in the CDE login window.

6.4.7

Possible Failure in the XOpenDisplay Call

When logging in to the CDE desktop, some applications may not restart.

The X server process may not be able to handle all of the requests for new open connections, causing some to fail in the XOpenDisplay call. Some applications, like xterm , log startup errors in the dxconsole window, such as the following error: xterm error: can’t open display :0

To avoid this problem, add the following resource to your

$HOME/.Xdefaults

file:

Dtsession*contManagement: 2

This resource enables a handshake protocol between the CDE session manager and window manager during the login phase to control the appearance of new windows. While it may marginally increase the time before the login completes, it better assures that all applications will be restarted.

This can be added to the /usr/dt/app-defaults/C/Dtsession file to make the change for all users automatically.

6.5 Windows Programming

The following note applies to windows programming.

6–6 Window System Software Notes

6.5.1

X11 Font Problem

In the Lucida-Typewriter-medium-R-normal fonts, the glyphs for multiplication and division are reversed. The multiplication symbol is where the division symbol should be, and vice versa. If the representation of these glyphs is important to your application, use a different font.

6.6 Internationalization

The following notes apply to restrictions on use of internationalization features in the windowing environments.

6.6.1

Japanese Keyboard Support in Console Mode

When running in single-user or console mode, Tru64 UNIX now supports two new Japanese keyboard types (JIS and ANSI) on AlphaStation and

AlphaServer systems. (Japanese keyboard support is not available on

TURBOchannel-based machines.)

To use JIS-type Japanese keyboards, like the PCXAJ-AA and LK411-JJ, you must set the language console environment variable to 50, as in the following example:

>>> set language 50

To use ANSI-type Japanese keyboards, like the LK411-AJ, you must set the language console environment variable to 52, as in the following example:

>>> set language 52

6.6.2

System-Default Keyboard Setting May Prevent User Login

When any user logs on to a system, the system-default keyboard setting must be appropriate for the keys that the user presses when entering characters in the username and password fields. Otherwise, characters that are correct from the user perspective, given the keyboard being used, might be treated as invalid. In this case, the user cannot log on the the system. This situation most often arises when a keyboard is being used in one language and the system-default keyboard setting is another language. You can change the system-default keyboard setting at the console prompt or, if the required language is not available at the console level, by editing the

Xserver.conf

file to change the keymap used by the X Server. See keyboard (5) for more detailed information about changing keyboard settings.

Window System Software Notes 6–7

6.6.3

Dxterm Does Not Support Latin-2, Latin-4, and Latin-Cyrillic

Characters

The dxterm application is not able to display Latin-2, Latin-4 and Latin-

Cyrillic Characters even when the locale is set correctly. Therefore, dxterm should not be used for displaying the following languages: Czech, Hungarian,

Lithuanian, Polish, Russian, Slovak, and Slovene. The dtterm application should be used in this case.

6–8 Window System Software Notes

Documentation Notes

This chapter contains release notes that apply to Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F

documentation. It discusses the following topics:

• Installation Guide

• System Administration

• Assembly Language Programmer’s Guide

• Programming with ONC RPC

• Gate Daemon Configuration Guide

• System Configuration and Tuning Guide

• Guide to Preparing Product Kits

• Online help volumes

• Device Driver Documentation

7.1 Installation Guide

The following notes apply to the Installation Guide.

7.1.1

Chapter 12 (Performing a Worldwide Update Installation)

In both Sections 12.7 and 12.8, Step 7 shows the following incorrect path for invoking the wwinstallupdate script:

% /mnt/ALPHA/WORLDWIDE/wwinstallupdate

The correct path for invoking the installupdate script is as follows:

% /mnt/Worldwide_Language_Support/kit/wwinstallupdate

7.1.2

Appendix E (Associated Product Descriptions)

The following section is an addition to Appendix E.

UniCensus

The unicensus directory contains the UNICEN301 software subset.

UniCensus is a tool for Tru64 UNIX that you can use to collect and archive system configuration information. UniCensus uses sys_check (8) to

produce a HTML report showing system configuration information, revision levels, storage subsystem configuration and other information. UniCensus is typically configured to collect configuration information on a periodic basis for archiving and transport to Compaq Services. It can also be configured to run on system reboot.

7.2 System Administration Guide

The following notes describe additional information for the System

Administration guide.

7.2.1

Section 10.5.2.1 (Print Symbols for Advanced Printing

Software)

The description of the printcap entries for Advanced Printing Software is inaccurate.

When setting up Advanced Printing Software, you should set the following print symbols:

• rm – specify @dpa to indicate that jobs submitted to this printer should be directed to the Advanced Printing Software inbound gateway. The inbound gateway submits the job to an Advanced Printing Software spooler.

• rp – specify the name of the Advanced Printing Software logical printer

7.2.2

Section E.4.1 (Hardware Requirements)

The Logical Partitions feature is supported on the AlphaServer GS140 system. An AlphaServer 8400 (upgraded to a GS140 by replacing the processor modules) is also supported.

XMI hardware may be used with Logical Partitions. However, XMI controllers and devices must be configured into partition zero (0). This is a console firmware restriction.

The minimum requirement for a partition is one IOP module. A partition may include a second IOP module. The maximum number of IOP modules for the entire system (the sum of all partitions) is three.

The restriction of a graphics device to windowing software (cannot be the console device) applies only to secondary partitions. A supported graphics device can be the console for the primary partition (partition 0). To use a graphics console, set the console environment variable to BOTH before

7–2 Documentation Notes

initializing partitions. For example:

P00>>> set console BOTH

7.2.3

Section E.4.3.3 (Configuring Logical Partitions)

The instructions for setting the IO port mask ( lp_io_mask ) do not take in to account a partition with two IOP module. For this case, the lp_io_mask is formed by combining (logical or) the masks for individual IOP modules slots. For example, to assign IOP modules in slots 7 and 8 to partition 1, lp_io_mask1 would be 180.

When assigning IOP modules to secondary partitions, it is important to remember that one of the IOPs assigned to the partition must be connected to a DWLPB with a KFE72 option installed. The KFE72 provides the console serial port for secondary partitions.

7.2.4

Section E.4.3.7 (Disabling Automatic Boot Reset)

The Tru64 UNIX Installation Guide recommends setting the boot_reset console environment variable to ON. This setting is not compatible with

Logical Partitions. The boot_reset console EV must be set to OFF.

7.2.5

Section E.4.3.8 (Set Memory Interleave Mode)

While setting the interleave mode to none, the console may echo a series of

Y characters to the console display screen (there could be several lines of Y characters). This is not an error and can be ignored.

7.2.6

Section E.4.4 (Initializing Partitions)

The normal sequence of commands is as follows:

P00>>> set lp_count n

(where n is the number of partitions)

P00>>> init

(initialize the primary partition)

P00>>> lpinit

(start secondary partitions)

P00>>> boot

Documentation Notes 7–3

(boot primary partition)

P##>>> boot

(boot secondary partitions)

Improper operation results if the lpinit command is omitted. The console firmware prevents this by automatically executing the lpinit command if the lp_count is nonzero and a boot command is issued on the primary partition’s console terminal.

On startup, each secondary partition displays configuration information

(similar to the message in Section E.4.3.1). It is possible for this message to be proceeded by a series of Y characters. This is not an error and can be ignored.

7.2.7

Section E.4.5 (Installing the Operating System)

The operating system can be installed from a CD–ROM or over the network from a Remote Installation Server (RIS). It may not always be practical to configure a CD–ROM drive on all partitions and/or a RIS server may not be available. One alternative (assuming a local network is available) is to install the operating system to one partition from a CD–ROM, then configure that partition as a RIS server for the other partitions. Refer to Sharing Software

on a Local Area Network for instructions on setting up a Remote Installation

Server.

7.3 Assembly Language Programmer’s Guide

The Assembly Language Programmer’s Guide (Chapter 5) should include a description of the .rconst

directive. This directive instructs the assembler to add subsequent data into the .rconst

section. This behavior is similar to the .rdata

directive, except that the entries cannot be relocatable.

7.4 Programming with ONC RPC

Sections 2.1.5 and 2.1.6 of the Programming with ONC RPC guide are correct only for a system running Tru64 UNIX or earlier version of the operating system. The code may not be portable to other UNIX systems.

If the client machine is not running Tru64 UNIX or earlier version of the operating system, copy the source code to the client. Check that the header calls are appropriate for the programming conventions on the client operating system and then compile the code locally.

7–4 Documentation Notes

7.5 Gate Daemon Configuration Guide

References to the Gate Daemon Configuration Guide in the Technical

Overview and possibly other books are obsolete because this document has been removed from the Tru64 UNIX 4.0F Documentation CD–ROM.

Information from the Gate Daemon Configuration Guide has been incorporated into the following reference pages: gated.conf

(4), gated.control

(4), gated.proto

(4), gated_intro (7), and gated (8).

7.6 System Configuration and Tuning Guide

In prior releases, reference information about kernel subsystem attributes was found in Appendix B of the System Configuration and Tuning Guide.

Starting with Version 4.0F, reference information about subsystem attributes resides in the reference pages. See sys_attrs (5) for more information.

Note that the current set of reference pages for subsystem attributes includes more subsystems than were formerly covered in the book appendix; however, there are still subsystems with attributes that do not have reference pages.

This omission will be addressed in a future release of the product.

The following errors exist in the sys_attrs_ufs (5) reference page:

• The default value for the inode-hash-size attribute is listed as 2048.

The correct default value is 512.

• The default value for the ufs-blkpref-lookbehind attribute is listed as 16. The correct default value is 8.

7.7 Guide to Preparing Product Kits

The following information should be included in the Guide to Preparing

Product Kits.

If you are developing an Asynchronous Hardware kit for Version 4.0F, you must ship symbolic links from the /sys/BINARY directory to every kernel module in your kit. In Version 4.0F, the kernel build process searches only the /sys/BINARY directory. As a result, symbolic links from the

/sys/BINARY directory to your kernel module must be shipped in the same subset.

The following corrections should be made to Appendix A of the Guide to

Preparing Product Kits.

Documentation Notes 7–5

7.7.1

Section A.1.12 (How to Build a Consolidated CD–ROM)

Step 3 of the instructions lists the incorrect paths:

% /usr/bin/mkisofs -D -R -a -d -o \

/spare/consolidate_digital_unix.cdfs /cdimage/

The correct paths are as follows:

% /usr/sbin/mkisofs -D -R -a -d -o \

/spare/consolidated_digital_unix.cdfs /cdimage/

7.7.2

Section A.2.2 (Building a Consolidated CD–ROM)

Step 4 of the instructions lists the incorrect paths:

% /usr/bin/mkisofs -D -R -a -d -o \

/spare/consolidate_digital_unix.cdfs /cdimage/

The correct paths are as follows:

% /usr/sbin/mkisofs -D -R -a -d -o \

/spare/consolidated_digital_unix.cdfs /cdimage/

7.8 Online Help Volumes

The notes in this section refer to problems with the online help volumes.

The Help viewer has the following known problems:

• In some cases, the help viewer is not correctly initialized. As a result, it will sometimes exhibit the expected behavior the second time an action is taken, but not the first time.

For example, the first time a quick help dialog box displays a reference page, the Backtrack button may be enabled even though there is no place to which to backtrack. If the dialog box is closed and then opened again, the Backtrack button is dimmed.

• Similarly, if a request for on-item help displays the correct help, but one line has scrolled off the top, the online help will typically be displayed in exactly the right position when the on-item help request is repeated.

7.8.1

General Problems

The following known problems occur in the online help:

• The Appearance menu is not consistently documented.

In the Archiver, License Manager, and System Information applications, there is an Appearance item on one of the menus. The item should offer three options: Text Only, Large Icon, and Small Icon. In some help

7–6 Documentation Notes

volumes, not all of these are documented.

• Some links from one help volume to another are displayed in a new view.

There are a few links from one help volume to another that appear in a new help viewer window. In some situations, a distracting proliferation of help viewer windows can result.

You can get a new view when you want one using the New Window item on the File menu in the help viewer.

7.8.2

Integration

The SysMan configuration applications on-item help does not work on the items in the menu bar.

In all the SysMan applications, the keyboard method of getting on-item help does not work on the Help menu.

7.8.3

Update Path in Installation Online Help Is Incorrect

The update installation path shown in the installation online help is not correct. The Preinstall Review List in the installation online help should state:

Your system must be running operating system Version 4.0D or 4.0E

to update to Version 4.0F.

7.8.4

Help Volumes by Application

The following problems apply only to help in specific applications:

• Kernel Tuner

The Kernel Tuner application records its changes immediately, so if a system failure occurs while the Kernel Tuner is running, any boot-time changes will take effect the next time the system boots. If the

/etc/sysconfigtab file contains invalid values, you can enter the following command at the boot prompt to boot with default values: boot -fl c

• Display Window

The help volume for Display Window has opening instructions that show how to access the application from the CDE Application Manager. These should show that the Display Window icon appears in two groups.

• Network Configuration

The names of the gated , joind , routed , and rwhod daemons are misspelled in the online help volume.

Documentation Notes 7–7

In the Configuring Interfaces dialog box, the fields under To Obtain IP

Address are relevant for all interfaces.

• Printer Configuration

In the Local Printer Settings dialog box and the Remote Printer Settings dialog box, the aliases in the Printer Aliases field must be separated by vertical bars because spaces are allowed in an alias.

• Shutdown

The /usr/sbin/shutdown command now sends the Shutdown

Message each time a reminder is sent of the time remaining before the system is shut down.

The /etc/nologin file is not created until immediately before the shutdown occurs.

System shutdown messages are sent to all users that are locally or remotely logged in to the system being shut down. Additionally, if the

"Broadcast to NFS Clients" option is selected, shutdown messages are broadcast to all hosts that are NFS clients of the system being shut down.

• Disk Configuration

The following corrected definitions replace the definitions in the glossary for Disk Configuration.

– Skew

A deviation from a reference direction, either by design or in response to lateral forces.

– Track skew

On a disk, the sector skew per track. The skew is the angle that sector 0 of the track changes from an imaginary radius line, due to a nonuniform number of sectors per track.

• BIND Configuration

The following corrected definitions replace the definitions in the glossary for BIND Configuration:

– BIND client

A system that queries a BIND server for host name and address information, interprets the responses, and passes the information to requesting applications.

– BIND server

An authoritative source for information about one or more zones. It either maintains the master copy of the hosts database for the zone or obtains the information required to serve the hosts database from another server.

7–8 Documentation Notes

– DCE

Distributed Computing Environment. The capabilities of DCE are defined by the Open Software Foundation (OSF).

– DCE cell

A logical group of systems that share services offered by DCE.

– DCE server

The server in a DCE cell.

– service type

In BIND Configuration, the available service types are BIND client and BIND server. The service type determines whether a system is configured to be a BIND client or a BIND server.

7.9 Device Driver Documentation

There are no changes to the Device Driver documentation for Version 4.0F.

Compaq maintains an online technical update page that contains any new information about the Device Driver Kit since the product was released. To view this document, go to the following URL: http://www.unix.digital.com/faqs/publications/ pub_page/ddk_update.html

Documentation Notes 7–9

Features and Interfaces Scheduled for

Retirement

This chapter lists features of Tru64 UNIX scheduled to be removed from, or changed in, future functional releases. Users and developers should plan to migrate away from or accomodate changes in these features in the near future.

8.1 DECwindows Applications

The following DECwindows utilities and tools will be retired in a future release of Tru64 UNIX. These dx* tools and utilities, commonly known as

DECwindows, have been replaced by the dt* tools in Common Desktop

Environment (CDE) that were introduced in Version 4.0 of the operating system. The replacement applications are listed in Table 8-1. Not all of the dx* applications that will be retired have a replacement due to the limited use or capability of that specific tool/utility.

Table 8-1: Retired DECwindows Applications

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Retired Tools/Utilities Replacement Option(s) dxprint dxcalendar dxcalc dxclock dxpaint dxnotepad dxbook dxcardfiler dxsession dtlp dtcm dtcalc,xcalc

Front Panel,xclock dticon/dtstyle,bitmap dtpad dthelpview,Netscape

N/A xdm,dtsession

N/A

You should migrate to the dt* tools/utilities or other options as soon as possible.

8.2 Adobe Display PostScript, Client Libraries, and X

Server Extension

Adobe has retired their Display PostScript (DPS) product, which includes the client libraries, X Server extension, and various applications and examples.

Therefore, Compaq has also retired the Adobe DPS product from Tru64

UNIX. No replacements are available. Customers who have used the Adobe

DPS libraries to develop their own applications do not have a migration path.

The following Adobe applications have been retired and are no longer included with the Tru64 UNIX operating system.

• dpsclock

• dpsexec

• draw

• fontview

• libdps.a

and libdps.so

• libdpstk.a

and libdpstk.so

• libpsres.a

and libpsres.so

• lib_adobe_dps.so

• makepsres

• pswrap

• scratchpad

• showps

• texteroids

• wonderland

• xepsf

• All Adobe fonts under /usr/lib/X11/fonts/Type1Adobe

The following applications, which use Adobe DPS, have been retired and are no longer included with the Tru64 UNIX operating system:

• dxvdoc

• dxbook

• dxnotepad (internationalized version in WorldWide Language Support software in the Tru64 UNIX Associated Products CD–ROM )

During an installupdate from Version 4.0D or Version 4.0E to Version 4.0F, the DPS commands, libraries, and documentation will be marked by the installupdate procedure as obsolete inventory. The files will remain on the system until they are removed during a subsequent updadmin step.

8–2 Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

Because these obsolete components have been retired from the operating system, they are no longer distributed in new versions, beginning with this version, and they might not be compatible with a future release. They are not supported as part of the Tru64 UNIX product beginning with this release.

If you have applications or procedures that depend on the DPS software that is now obsolete, you might want to keep the obsolete DPS software on your system, yet remove the other obsolete software at this time.

Before you perform the updadmin procedure, you can edit the file

/var/adm/smlogs/upd_obsolete_files so that the DPS software components are not listed.

If you remove the DPS components from your system by using the updadmin utility, you will have the opportunity to archive all of the obsolete components. If you prepare an archive copy, and later discover a dependency on the obsolete DPS components, you can restore them to the system from the archive copy.

If you remove the obsolete DPS components without making an archival copy, there is no way to restore them from the product distribution media for the current release.

See Section 4.1.9.6 for information on possible user dependencies on the showps utility as a PostScript document viewer for the Netscape browser.

The freeware application gv might be a suitable replacement for showps . It has a different user interface than showps but has no dependency on the obsolete DPS software libraries.

Some of the freeware applications delivered with Version 4.0D had dependencies on the DPS client libraries. Those applications have been rebuilt using the GhostScript libraries available on the freeware distribution media.

8.3 Nonconforming Curses Library

Version 4.0 of the operating system included a new X/Open compliant

Internationalized Curses library. This library was not binary compatible with previous versions of the Tru64 UNIX Curses library, so compatible binaries

(named libcurses.a

and libcurses.so

) were shipped in separate directories for Version 4.0. In that same release, the intent to put the compatible binaries into an obsolete subset and subsequently remove them in future releases was announced.

These compatible binaries were moved into the OSFOBSOLETE subset for

Version 4.0D and will be removed in a future release of Tru64 UNIX.

Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement 8–3

8.4 The -oldc C Compiler

The official C compiler for Tru64 UNIX is DEC C. The previous compiler, implemented with -oldc , is no longer distributed in the default subset and will not be installed during a default system installation.

The -oldc compiler is still available in this version by installing the

CMPDEVENH subset. Any problems reported with -oldc will be addressed in DEC C for Tru64 UNIX rather than in the -oldc compiler.

8.5 The dbx Debugger

The dbx symbolic debugger will be retired in a future release of Tru64

UNIX. The dbx debugger will be replaced by the ladebug debugger, which is a superset of the dbx functionality. The ladebug debugger is command line compatible with dbx and also supports a graphical user interface.

Compaq recommends that you begin using the ladebug debugger now and report any problems. This will provide a higher quality replacement when dbx is finally retired.

8.6 DEC C Compiler Default Change from -std0 to -std

The default language mode for the Tru64 UNIX C compiler will change from

-std0 to -std . This will occur in a future release.

When the change occurs, it will be possible to revert back to -std0 by specifying -std0 on the compilation command line, by adding -std0 to the /usr/ccs/lib/cmplrs/cc/comp.config

file, or by using an environment variable.

8.7 Change in struct utmp, struct utmpx, and struct lastlog

To provide compliance with several UNIX and Internet standards, the struct utmp , struct utmpx , and struct lastlog structures will be changed in the next major release (Version 5.0) of Tru64 UNIX. These changes will affect the /usr/include/utmp.h

,

/usr/include/utmpx.h

, and /usr/include/lastlog.h

files:

• The time field in struct utmp will change from a time_t structure to a struct __ut_timeval structure (to be consistent with

/usr/include/utmpx.h

).

• The ut_host field size (in struct utmp and struct utmpx ) will be increased to comply with relevant Internet RFCs.

8–4 Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

• The ll_line and ll_host manifest constants in

/usr/include/lastlog.h

will change to allow their sizes to correspond to the ut_line and ut_host fields in struct utmp and struct utmpx .

These changes will also affect the format of the /var/adm/utmp ,

/var/adm/wtmp , and /var/adm/lastlog files. The following conversion programs will be supplied:

• /usr/lbin/wtmpconvert

• /usr/lbin/llconvert

The programs will enable you to convert your existing /var/adm/wtmp and /var/adm/lastlog files to the new format or convert new format files to the old format for use by existing programs. See the corresponding reference pages for more information.

8.8 C Language long double Type Changing to 128 Bits

In a future release of Tru64 UNIX, the default size of the C language long double type will change from 64 bits to 128 bits. This will allow application writers to perform mathematical calculations on numbers much larger in magnitude with more precision than possible with the current long double type, which is treated identically to the double type. A compiler option will be provided to allow existing source code that expects a 64-bit long double type to continue to be compiled and executed.

The one binary incompatibility that an existing application (if linked using the -call_shared switch) could experience with the new default is related to the input and output of long double types. Currently, the printf and scanf functions, and other associated functions, interpret the format code %Lf (capital-L followed by f) as referring to a 64-bit long double type. In a future release, the interpretation of this format code will be changed to expect the new 128-bit data type. Programs that use this format code will either need to be changed, or will need to be run with the new compatibility library that will be provided. An extra step will be necessary to cause the application to use this library, and will be documented in the release in which the change actually takes affect.

8.9 C Library Functions and POSIX P1003.1C

As of Version 4.0 of the operating system, the following C library functions exist in two versions due to conflicts between previous versions of Tru64

UNIX and the recent IEEE POSIX P1003.1C standard (these new interfaces are in effect by default). The old interfaces are currently accessible by

Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement 8–5

defining the C preprocessor symbol _POSIX_C_SOURCE to 199309L .

asctime_r ctime_r getgrgid_r getgrnam_r getlogin_r getpwnam_r getpwuid_r gmtime_r localtime_r readdir_r rand_r ttyname_r

Binary compatibility is maintained in Version 4.0F; however, these routines will be retired in a future release of the operating system. The obsolete versions should not be used in new designs. These routines formerly resided in libc_r.a

and libc_r.so

, but were merged into the standard C runtime library.

8.10 POSIX 1003.4a (draft 4) pthread Routines in

DECthreads

The POSIX 1003.4a, Draft 4 interface of DECthreads will be retired in a future release of Tru64 UNIX. Applications that were written using the

POSIX 1003.4a, Draft 4 API should be migrated to the IEEE Std 1003.1c-

1995, POSIX System Application Program Interface provided by

DECthreads. The POSIX 1003.1c standard interface is the most portable, efficient, and powerful programming interface offered by DECthreads. A compatibility mode for the Draft 4 POSIX 1003.4a API has been provided to help ease migration. This compatibility mode will be removed in a future release.

8.11 DECthreads CMA Interface

The CMA interface of DECthreads is obsolete beginning with this release of

Tru64 UNIX. Obsolescence means that while the CMA API will continue to exist in Tru64 UNIX and will be supported, CMA routines will no longer be documented or enhanced. Compaq recommends that you port your CMA based application to the IEEE Std 1003-1c-1995, POSIX System Application

Program Interface provided by DECthreads.

8.12 Asynchronous I/O Binary Compatibility

Data structures for asynchronous I/O, like aio_read() and aio_write() , changed between DIGITAL UNIX Version 3.2 and Version

4.0. The kernel currently handles these differences so that applications built under Version 3.2 continue to run when executed on Version 4.0x systems.

In the next major release of the operating system, support for applications built under Version 3.2x using asynchronous I/O will be discontinued. These applications will need to be recompiled and relinked in order to run properly under Tru64 UNIX.

8–6 Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

8.13 Nemacs

Nemacs Version 3.3.2, a public domain Japanese implementation of emacs , will be retired in a future release of Tru64 UNIX.

Mule , a public domain multilingual implementation of emacs , will be carried forward as the replacement functionality for Nemacs. The Nemacs subsets

IOSJPNEMACS440 and IOSJPNEMACSSRC440 will be removed from the system. For more information on Mule , refer to the mule (1) reference page.

8.14 Berkeley Software Distribution TTY-NAME

The intent to retire the BSD TTY-NAME namespace was announced in DEC

OSF/1 Version 3.0. This functionality will be retired in a future release.

8.15 SCSI Device Names

Support for rz SCSI device names will be retired in a future release of

Tru64 UNIX. Any code that derives knowledge about a device from the

ASCII name or minor number may be impacted.

All code that uses the current namespace will be compatible when the change occurs because a mechanism that ensures binary compatibility will be provided. Existing interfaces such as names and minor numbers will be fully supported.

8.16 The -x and -p Options in addvol and mkfdmn

The -x and -p options of the addvol and mkfdmn commands allow you to set the per-volume bitfile metadata table (BMT) when you create a new volume or file domain. Users typically set the BMT to prevent an extent exhaustion problem.

In Version 4.0D and later, the limitations in the operating system that caused the extent exhaustion problem were removed, hence the -x and -p options are no longer needed and will be retired in a future major release.

8.17 LSM Block Change Logging (BCL)

In the next major release of Tru64 UNIX, the Logical Storage Manager

Block Change Logging (BCL) feature will be retired and replaced by a new logging method. This new logging method, called Dirty Region Logging

(DRL), will log regions instead of blocks for writes to LSM mirrored volumes. For most environments, DRL will provide the same ability to quickly resynchronize mirrors after a failure as BCL, but with considerably less logging overhead.

Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement 8–7

The logging format and configuration for DRL will not be compatible with

BCL; for example, DRL will require a log size of at least two blocks. The next major release of Tru64 UNIX will automatically reconfigure volumes for

DRL when a BCL mirrored volume has a log of two or more blocks.

Mirrored volume configurations with a BCL of one block will require manual reconfiguration to continue to take advantage of logging for faster mirror recovery.

Due to these changes, you can configure a BCL size of two or more blocks to simplify BCL to DRL migration in the future. For optimum DRL configurations, use the following guidelines when configuring volumes with

BCL: use a BCL subdisk block size of one block plus an additional block for every 1 GB of volume storage, then round up the BCL size to the next even number. Table 8-2 shows some examples.

6

7

4

5

8

9

2

3

<1

1

Table 8-2: BCL Configuration Examples

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Volume Size (GB) BCL Subdisk Size (Blocks)

8

8

6

6

4

4

2

2

10

10

12

8.18 LSM volassist Command Syntax

In the next major release of Tru64 UNIX, the syntax of the volassist command will change. It will no longer support the following constructs:

• [!]medianame,offset

You will still be able to use [!]medianame,offset construct but you will not be able to specify an offset. If you need to specify an offset, you will have to use the low-level commands to create subdisks, plexes, and volumes exactly as required.

8–8 Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

• alloc=size

A new construct, alloc=storage-spec[,storage-spec,...] , will replace alloc=size . However, the new construct will not allow you to specify sizes for all allocations. You will need to use the lowlevel commands to create subdisks, plexes, and volumes exactly as required.

• align=size

Two new constructs, diskalign and nodiskalign , will replace align=size, allowing you to specify whether subdisks should be created on cylinder boundaries. If you require the ability to specify alignments for all allocations, you will need to use the low-level commands to create subdisks, plexes, and volumes exactly as required.

8.19 LSM volprint Command Format

In the next major release of Tru64 UNIX, the default output format of the volprint command will be changing.

Invoking volprint with no options currently displays all objects in rootdg , starting with the rootdg disk group record, followed by all of the disk-media records, subdisk records, plex records, and finally volume records.

In a future release, invoking volprint with no options will display all records for all disk groups, with all objects arranged in a hierarchical fashion.

Invoking volprint with an object-type option ( v , p , or s ) currently displays all objects of that type in the specific disk group. In a future release, invoking volprint with any of these options will display all objects of that type, as well as all objects of all subsidiary types, in all disk groups.

By default, invoking volprint currently displays the record type, name, association, kernel state, length, and comment field. In a future release, it will display the record type, name, association, kernel state, length, plex offset, state, and the tuti10 and puti10 fields.

Users who use volprint in scripts should use the -F option to define the exact output format that they require.

8.20 LVM-to-LSM Migration Tool

The LVM-to-LSM Migration Tool was provided with Version 4.0 of the operating system to enable migration from the LVM interfaces that were retired in that release to Tru64 UNIX Logical Storage Manager volumes.

This tool will become obsolete in later releases of Tru64 UNIX because most customers will have migrated to LSM volumes by that time; therefore, the

LVM-to-LSM Migration Tool will be retired in a future release of the operating system.

Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement 8–9

There are no plans to retire UFS or the AdvFS Migration Tools at this time.

8.21 OSF/Motif Version 1.1.3

The Motif Version 1.1.3 libraries have been provided as run-time services for compatibility with applications that have not yet converted to Motif 1.2.

Development support was retired in DEC OSF/1 Version 2.0.

In Version 4.0 of the operating system, the Motif 1.1.3 libraries were moved to an optional subset. Applications requiring the libraries will see an error from the loader and you must install the optional subset. This optional subset will be removed from the product in a future release.

8.22 XIE Version 3.0 X Client Extension

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F supports XIE Version 5.0. Support for XIE

Version 3.0 server extensions was removed in Version 4.0, but client support will not be removed until a later release of Tru64 UNIX.

8.23 Microsoft Sound Board Driver

In Version 4.0 of the operating system, the device driver for the base audio on the DIGITAL AlphaStations and DIGITAL AlphaServers was removed from the base operating system. This device driver supported the Microsoft

Sound Board (MSB), the AlphaStation Sound Card, and the built-in audio hardware shipped with certain AlphaStation systems.

The driver binaries are now available as part of the Multimedia Services for

Tru64 UNIX kit on the Tru64 UNIX 4.0F Associated Products, Volume 1

CD–ROM in the MMEDRVMSB subset.

The following files will be removed from the base operating system:

• /usr/sys/BINARY/msb.o

• /usr/sys/include/io/dec/eisa/msb.h

• /usr/sys/include/io/dec/eisa/msb_reg.h

You can also get support for this device from the Multimedia Services for

Tru64 UNIX kit that is located on the Software Products Library CD-ROM.

Support is also factory-installed on all AlphaStation Tru64 UNIX packaged systems. The license for this product is bundled with AlphaStations so that you can use it at no additional cost.

8–10 Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

8.24 Graph Utility

The /usr/bin/graph utility will be removed in the next major release of

Tru64 UNIX.

8.25 The atmsetup Script

The atmsetup script is a new utility with Version 4.0D that allows you to set up or change the current configuration of ATM on your system.

This script was designed to be an interim solution to simplify the setup process for ATM. In future releases, it will be supplemented and finally replaced by an application in the SysMan suite, with a full graphical user interface.

For more information about how to use atmsetup , see the atmsetup (8) reference page and the Asynchronous Transfer Mode guide.

8.26 Remote Prestoserve Support

In the next major release of Tru64 UNIX, PrestoServe support for remote operations will be retired. This means that the use of the -h option of the presto command, the dxpresto hostname variable, and the -n option of the prestoctl_svc command will no longer be supported.

Users who require the ability to perform presto operations remotely can still do so by using telnet , rlogin , or rsh to gain access to a shell on the remote system and then to perform the operation locally.

8.27 Disk Size Requirement for Installation

The minimum disk size requirement for installing the Tru64 UNIX operating system is changing in the next major release due to additional features and services that are being added. The minimum disk size required to support a single-disk operating system installation will be 1GB (such as an RZ26) for both default and custom installation types.

8.28 Installupdate -i Option

The -i option to the /sbin/installupdate command will be retired in a future release of the operating system.

The -i option currently allows you to interactively select kernel components once the new software subsets have been installed. Starting with the next major release, this flag will be unnecessary because you will be able to interactively select optional kernel components at the beginning of the update installation process, prior to software installation. These kernel components

Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement 8–11

will be built into the kernel automatically during the kernel build phase at the end of the update installation; therefore, you need not be present at that time.

8.29 Different awk Versions

Tru64 UNIX contains three different versions of the awk command:

• oawk - Old awk is the original awk command.

• gawk - GNU awk is the Free Software Foundation’s version.

• nawk - Is the new version of the awk command and is current linked to awk . This version of the awk command is the XPG4-compliant version of the awk command.

The oawk and gawk versions of the awk command will be removed in a future version of the operating system. Also, the link between awk and nawk will be removed, leaving awk and removing nawk . Users should ensure that their scripts use /usr/bin/awk instead of any other version of the awk command currently existing on the system.

8.30 The secsetup Script

The /usr/sbin/secsetup script, used to configure Enhanced Security authentication support, will retire in a future release of Tru64 UNIX. It will be replaced by sec_config , an application in the SysMan suite that provides a full graphical user interface.

8.31 Open3D TURBOchannel and PVpci Device Support

Support for the following Open3D TURBOchannel devices has been retired from this release of Tru64 UNIX (code is shipped as unsupported):

• HX+

• PV-L

• PV-M

These devices are also known as:

• ZLX-E1, E2, E3

• ZLX-L1, L2

• ZLX-M1, M2

Open3D V4.4 is the last version that supports these graphic adapters. The

DDX and device drivers will ship in future releases of Tru64 UNIX, but support will be retired and Open3D will no longer respond to problem

8–12 Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

reports. Tru64 UNIX 2D support will continue for future Tru64 UNIX

V4.0n releases and the initial release of Tru64 UNIX Version 5.0 for the TX,

HX, and HX+ graphic adapters.

The replacement functionality is PCI based systems and graphics devices supported in those systems.

In addition, the Open3D PVpci (ZLXp-L1 and ZLXp-L2) graphic adapter support ended in December 1998. The last version of Open3D to support these cards was Open3D Version 4.9. The last version of Tru64 UNIX to support these adapters is Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F. The replacement functionality is the PowerStorm 4Dxx (Intergraph Cateyes) graphic devices.

8.32 System Management Utilities

The following setup scripts will be retired in a future release:

• bindsetup

• mailsetup

• netsetup

• nfssetup

• ntpsetup

These scripts have been replaced by tasks that you can perform by running the SysMan menu and navigating to the desired item or directly from the command line by using the appropriate menu accelerator. The following table maps the replacement functionality and accelerator.

222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Retired Script SysMan Menu Item SysMan Accelerator bindsetup mailsetup netsetup nfssetup ntpsetup

Configure system as a DNS client

Configure system as a DNS server

Configure the host’s mail system

Network Configuration Step-by-Step dns_client dns_server mailsetup net_step

Configure System as an NFS client nfs_client

Configure System as an NFS server nfs_server ntp_config

For more information, see the reference pages or the Network Administration manual.

Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement 8–13

8.33 Changed Protected Password Database Format

The enhanced security user authentication profiles, originally stored in the protected password files /tcb/files/auth/<a..z>/<username> , are now stored by default in a database format. The convauth program, run for an update installation, will convert existing files into the new format. Support for the original format will be removed in a future release of Tru64 UNIX.

8.34 Audit_setup Script

The /usr/sbin/audit_setup script, used to configure auditing support, will be retired in a future release of Tru64 UNIX. It will be replaced by audit_config , an application in the SysMan suite that provides a full graphical user interface.

8.35 VM Subsystem ubc_nfsloopback Variable Is

Obsolete

The /etc/sysconfigtab ubc_nfsloopback Virtual Memory (VM) subsystem kernel configuration variable is unnecessary, and has been removed.

This configuration variable was needed in some TruCluster configurations with previous versions of Tru64 UNIX to avoid a recursion deadlock with

NFS loopback-mounted file systems. In those configurations, setting the ubc_nfsloopback VM subsystem variable to 1 prevented the deadlock.

The file system code in Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F has been modified to prevent the deadlock which removes the need for the ubc-nfsloopback variable.

If the variable is not removed from /etc/sysconfigtab , it will not cause a problem. However, after the kernel is loaded by the firmware, the console generates the following message to indicate that the variable is still present in /etc/sysconfigtab: sysconfigtab: attribute ubc_nfsloopback not in subsystem VM

8.36 libsecurity.a

libsecurity.a

is the static archive form of the enhanced security library.

This form of libsecurity is no longer delivered in Tru64 UNIX.

Customers wishing to link against libsecurity should instead use the shareable form, libsecurity.so

.

8–14 Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

8.37 XPG3 ctab Locales

The XPG3 ctab locales in the obsolete OSFCTABLOC subset will be retired in a future release. These locales were superseded by the XPG4 locales distributed in OSFEURLOC and various subsets in the Worldwide Language

Support software on the Associated Products CD (APCD).

8.38 Security Interfaces

Several interfaces in libsecurity will be retired in a future release of

Tru64 UNIX. These interfaces are not capable of supporting new functionality offered in Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F.

Binary compatibility will be preserved until the interfaces are retired, which will be no sooner than 12 months after the current release is shipped. Table

8-3 provides the complete list of documented interfaces. Some undocumented interfaces might be retired at the same time.

Table 8-3: libsecurity Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222 getprtcent() getprdfent() getprfient() getprlpent() getprtcnam() getprdfnam() getprfinam() getprlpnam() getdvagent() getprpwent() putprpwnam() time_lock() getdvagnam() getprpwnam() get_seed() locked_out() copydvent() read_pw_fields() store_pw_fields() read_tc_fields() store_tc_fields() putprtcnam() putprdfnam() putprfinam() putprlpnam() putdvagnam() getprpwuid() auth_for_terminal()

Table 8-4 provides the list of associated data structures that will be retired at the same time as the interfaces.

Table 8-4: libsecurity Data Structure Interfaces Scheduled for

Retirement

222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222 struct pr_field struct t_field struct l_field struct dev_field struct pr_passwd struct pr_file struct pr_flag struct t_flag struct l_flag struct dev_flag struct pr_term struct pr_lp

Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement 8–15

Table 8-4: (continued)

222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222 struct pr_default struct dev_asg struct system_default_fields struct system_default_flags

8.39 The ogated Routing Daemon

The ogated (the old version of the gated routing daemon) will be retired in a future release of Tru64 UNIX. If you use the ogated routing daemon, you should migrate to the gated routing daemon, which supports a superset of functionality in ogated .

8.40 PEX Extensions

Starting with Open3D Version 4.8, support for the PEX extension to the X

Server has been retired. The extension libraries still ship on the Open3D product, but no support is available for them.

8.41 NL* and NL* libc Interfaces

A Worldwide Portability Interface (WPI) for internationalization based on the

XPG4 standard was introduced in DIGITAL UNIX Version 2.0. Because the

WPI interfaces supercede the libc OSF/1 proprietary interfaces, all libc interfaces that begin with the letters NL or NC will be removed in a future release of the operating system.

8.42 DEC Ada RTL

DEC Ada (UPI - 0HM) and DEC Ada PDO (UPI - 0VS) will be retired in a future release of Tru64 UNIX.

8.43 System V Environment

The System V Environment product (QL-0J6A*-**) will be reengineered and its functionality will be merged into the Tru64 UNIX base operating system in a future major release of the operating system. Today, Tru64 UNIX already delivers 80 percent of the System V Interface Definition (SVID) standard, as verified by the SVVS 3 and SVVS 4 test suites. As a result,

Tru64 UNIX contains a substantial number of System V Release 4 (SVR4) features and delivers the highest composite SVR4 conformance of any implementation. SVR4 functionality will be further expanded in the base operating system when the System V Environment reengineering is complete,

8–16 Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement

eliminating the need for the layered product. A migration plan for upgrading to the appropriate version of the Tru64 UNIX base operating system has been developed to assist our customers who currently use the System V

Environment layered product.

Features and Interfaces Scheduled for Retirement 8–17

System Limits

A.1 System Limits

This appendix lists the system limits for the major components of this release. For hardware information specific to your individual processor, see the Tru64 UNIX Software Product Description (SPD) and the Systems &

Options Catalog.

You may be able to increase some of the system limits by changing kernel attribute values. Use the sysconfig command to display the current attribute values, and the maximum and minimum values. For information on how to modify attributes, see the System Administration manual and the

System Configuration and Tuning manual, which also includes lists of tunable attributes.

The following sections describe the system limits.

A.1.1

Installation Requirements

A default installation of the Tru64 UNIX operating system requires at least

525 MB of disk space (for example, a RZ25 disk). This limit will change in a future release (see Section 8.27 for more information). The disk space that a custom installation requires depends on the optional subsets that you will install. See Appendix B for information about subset sizes.

A.1.2

Memory Limits

The memory limits are as follows:

• Physical memory requirements

The minimum amount of physical memory that Tru64 UNIX requires is

64 MB.

The system platform limits the maximum amount of physical memory.

For more information on platform memory support, see the Systems &

Options Catalog.

• Virtual address space limit

The default amount of virtual address space available for each process is

1 GB. However, in many cases, available swap space may be exhausted before this limit is reached.

You can increase the available virtual address space to a maximum of 4

TB by modifying the value of the vm-maxvas attribute in the vm subsystem. For more information about setting this attribute, see the

System Configuration and Tuning guide.

• Page size

The physical page size is 8 KB and cannot be changed. The page size is hardware dependent and is set by the console at boot time.

A.1.3

Process Limits

The process limits for the system and for users are as follows:

• Per system

The maxusers attribute in the proc subsystem specifies the number of simultaneous users that a system can support without straining system resources. System algorithms use the maxusers attribute to size various system data structures, and to determine the amount of space allocated to system tables, such as the system process table, which is used to determine how many active processes can be running at one time.

The default value assigned to the maxusers attribute depends on the size of your system. The default value is 32 users on systems with at least 64 MB of physical memory. The minimum value is 8 and the maximum value is 4096.

The maximum number of tasks that can run simultaneously on a system is determined by the value of the task-max attribute in the proc subsystem. The default value is 8213. The minimum value is 85, and the maximum value is 32768.

The maximum number of kernel threads that can run simultaneously on a system is determined by the value of the thread-max attribute in the proc subsystem. The default value is 16424. The minimum value is

160, and the maximum value is 262136.

• Per user

The maximum number of processes that a user can create is determined by the value of the max-proc-per-user attribute in the proc subsystem. The default value is 64. The minimum value is 0, and the maximum value is 32767.

The maximum number of threads that a user can create is determined by the value of the max-threads-per-user attribute in the proc subsystem. The default value is 256. The minimum value is 0, and the maximum value is 18,446,744,073,709,551,615 (2

64 −

1).

A–2 System Limits

A.1.4

Device Addressing Limits

The limits for device addressing are as follows:

• Device access

There are two types of disk device access: raw (character) and buffered

(block).

For raw or character access, the uio.uio_offset

structure field describes the byte offset within the disk partition. In this release, the uio_offset is an unsigned 64-bit value, allowing an offset up to 2

64 or 18 exabytes. This value is converted to a physical block/sector number, which is the data transfer start position. The physical block/sector number is limited by the buf.b_blkno

structure field.

For buffered or block access, the buf.b_blkno

structure field describes the block/sector offset within the disk partition and is a signed 32-bit value. Because this release supports a fixed 512-byte block/sector size, as defined by DEV_BSIZE , the offset is limited to 1 TB.

• Major-minor numbers ( dev_t )

Devices are identified by a major-minor pair of numbers, where the major number specifies the device driver and the minor number identifies the device. In this release, this pairing is represented by a 32-bit value described by the type dev_t . The major number portion of dev_t consists of bits 20 to 31 (a total of 12 bits). Because each device driver requires 12 bits for its major number, you can configure only 4096 device drivers into the system.

The minor number portion of dev_t consists of bits 0 to 19 (a total of

20 bits). The device driver is responsible for interpreting these bits. A device driver that utilizes all 20 bits for device addressing can address up to 1048576 devices for each major number. For device drivers that support disk devices, some of the bits in the minor device number represents the partition number. This release requires disk drivers to reserve the lower 6 bits for device attributes and partition numbers, and only supports eight partitions.

• SCSI/CAM addressing

Common Access Method (CAM) is an ANSI-proposed standard for a common software interface to the Small Computer Systems Interface

(SCSI). There are no restrictions or limitations within CAM for disk block addressing, because the address is an incoming value.

For SCSI-2, the Command Descriptor Block (CDB) defines the starting disk block number for the transfer. In this release, the 10-byte CDB reserves 4 bytes for the disk block address. This is an unsigned 32-bit value that allows 2

32 −

1 or 4 gigasectors of addressing. Using a 512-byte block/sector size, this value corresponds to 2 TB.

System Limits A–3

In this release, the SCSI/CAM driver can address a maximum of 64 buses, with up to 7 device targets for each bus, and a maximum of eight logical unit numbers (LUNs) for each device target. According to these limitations, SCSI/CAM can address a maximum of 3584 devices.

• Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID)

Refer to the following for complete information:

– Systems & Options Catalog

– Product description literature

– Web pages: http://www.digital.com/products.html

http://www.storage.digital.com

• Disklabel command

The disklabel command specifies the partitions of a disk and their starting block/sector number. The starting block/sector number of a partition is defined by the partition.p_offset

structure field, which is an unsigned 32-bit value that supports up to 2 TB of addressing, using a 512-byte block/sector size.

A.1.5

Device Limits

Tru64 UNIX supports a maximum of seven devices per SCSI bus (for example, one host bus adapter and seven disks). The maximum number of

SCSI buses supported by a system depends on the platform, but the Tru64

UNIX operating system supports a maximum of 64 SCSI buses.

For all other device limits, see the Systems & Options Catalog.

A.1.6

Logical Storage Manager Limits

In this release, the Logical Storage Manager (LSM), supports a maximum of

768 disk groups and 256 disks, either in a disk group or across the system.

The LSM term volume refers to a virtual disk that represents an addressable range of disk blocks. File system data or raw I/O can be directed to a volume. This release supports a maximum of 1 TB of disk space in a disk group or on a system, and a maximum volume size of 1 TB. The maximum number of supported LSM volumes is 4093 for all disk groups in a system, which includes 4091 nonsystem volumes and 2 system (root or swap) volumes.

The LSM term plex refers to a physical disk or a set of disks that contain a complete copy of a volume’s data. A mirrored volume consists of at least two plexes. In this release, the maximum number of supported plexes per volume is 8, and the maximum number of supported plexes per system is

A–4 System Limits

4093 (or 4091, if root and swap volumes are not used).

The LSM term subdisk refers to a contiguous portion of a physical disk that can be striped or concatenated with other subdisks to form a plex. A maximum of 4096 subdisks can be associated with one plex, and Compaq supports 4096 subdisks in each disk group or on a system.

LSM object names (for example, volumes, plexes, subdisks, and disk groups), volume attribute names (such as user and group), and dxlsm view names are limited to 14 characters.

A.1.7

File System Limits

The file system limits are as follows:

• Advanced File System

The Advanced File System (AdvFS) term volume refers to a single logical device, such as a disk, disk partition, or a logical volume. A file

domain is a named set of one or more volumes. A fileset is a named and mountable logical file structure that is created in a domain. An active

fileset is a fileset that is currently mounted.

AdvFS supports a maximum fileset and file size of 16 TB minus 512 K, a maximum of 255 active file domains for each system, and a maximum of

256 volumes for each domain. However, because a single disk failure in a multivolume file domain can make the entire domain inaccessible,

Compaq recommends that you use a maximum of eight volumes in a file domain.

Although Tru64 UNIX supports an unlimited number of filesets per system, only 767 filesets can be mounted at one time. The maximum number of files in a fileset is 2

31 and is limited by the tag that is used to uniquely identify a file in a fileset. Because of a sequence number limit, a tag can be used only 4096 times; therefore, the actual limit on files in a fileset decreases over time.

Although AdvFS can support a page size larger than 13 bits, the maximum size of an AdvFS file and fileset is 16 TB - 512 K (2

13 with a 13-bit page size and a 31-bit page number.

* 2

31

),

AdvFS supports a maximum of 767 mounted filesets. However, each active file domain has a hidden mounted fileset that must be counted when determining the total number of mounted filesets. For example, if you have an active file domain with two visibly mounted filesets, the file domain actually has three mounted filesets.

The AdvFS verify utility cannot validate domains with more than 767 filesets.

System Limits A–5

• UNIX File System

In this release, the UNIX File System (UFS) file size is limited by the amount of space that can be addressed by the kernel buf structure. The buf.b_blkno

structure field, defined as daddr_t , is a 32-bit signed value, and specifies the block/sector offset within a disk partition. The

DEV_BSIZE , block or sector size, is 512 bytes. Theoretically, a UFS file system could be 1 TB (2

13

* 2

9

); however, Tru64 UNIX supports only

128 GB. The maximum LSM logical volume size also limits a UFS file system and file size.

Tru64 UNIX supports up to 2,147,483,647 UNIX File System (UFS) and

Memory File System (MFS) mounts. The max-ufs-mounts attribute controls the maximum number of UFS and MFS mounts. The default value is 1000.

• CD–ROM File System

The size of ISO 9660 CD–ROM File System (CDFS) files and file systems is limited by the CD–ROM media on which they reside.

Currently, the CD–ROM media supports approximately 600 MB.

However, Tru64 UNIX is able to support larger ISO 9660 file systems on other media.

This release supports a maximum of 512 CDFS mounts.

• Sparse files

Tru64 UNIX supports sparse files on AdvFS and UFS; therefore, the logical size of a file (that is, the offset to the last data actually present) can exceed the size of the file system in which it resides. The maximum sizes for sparse files are as follows:

– AdvFS – 2

– UFS – 2

44

44 −

512K

8 K

• Network File System

In this release, the theoretical maximum sizes of files that are accessible through Network File System (NFS) Version 2 and Version 3 are as follows:

– NFS Version 2 – (2 GB – 1 byte)

– NFS Version 3 – 18 exabytes (2

64 −

1)

However, Tru64 UNIX supports the following maximum file sizes:

– NFS Version 2 – 2 GB

– NFS Version 3 – 512 GB

In addition, an NFS file system is always limited by the size of the local file system that is being exported.

A–6 System Limits

An NFS Version 2 or Version 3 client can mount a maximum of 2048 files or directories.

• Memory mapped file limit

The maximum supported size of a file that can be mapped into memory without segmenting the file depends on the virtual address space limits, as documented in the section on memory limits.

• Open files limit

The open-max-soft and open-max-hard attributes control the maximum number of open file descriptors per process for all processes.

The default value is 4096. When the open-max-soft limit is reached, a warning message is issued, and when the open-max-hard limit is reached, the process is stopped. The maximum number of open files per process is 65,536. If you increase the maximum number of open files per process, make sure that you adjust the value of the max-vnodes attribute.

File descriptor entries in the per process file table are dynamically allocated after the initial 64 entries in the utask structure are used.

• File locking limits

The Tru64 UNIX file record locking service allows applications to lock any number of bytes in a file in the range of 0 to 2

63 −

1, inclusive. File locking is supported by UFS, AdvFS, and both NFS Version 2 and

Version 3. Because the NFS Version 2 protocol suite allows ranges to be specified only with 32-bit numbers, it supports a file locking range of 0 to

2

31 −

1, inclusive.

• Pathname limits

AdvFS, UFS, CDFS, and NFS support a maximum pathname component of 255 bytes and a maximum file pathname of 1023 bytes.

A.1.8

Networking Limits

The networking limits are as follows:

• Pseudoterminals ( ptys )

The maximum number of supported ptys is 8192.

• LAT connections

– The maximum number of incoming LAT connections is 4800.

– The maximum number of outgoing LAT connections is 4000.

• IP alias addresses

Tru64 UNIX allows the use of up to 5,000 IP alias addresses before

System Limits A–7

system performance begins to degrade.

• Packetfilter limits

The packetfilter pseudo-driver can support up to 255 simultaneous open filters (each filter is usually mapped to one instance of an application program). The packetfilter can support a maximum of 255 devices. Use the pfconfig command to configure packet filters.

• Network transfer rates

For information on network transfer rates, see the Technical Overview.

A.1.9

Limits for Backup Utilities

The limits for the backup utilities are as follows:

• cpio

Files per archive: No limit

Files per file system: No limit

File size:

File name size:

4 GB

256 bytes

• dd

Files per archive: Not used

Files per file system: Not used

File size: 4 GB

File name size: Not used

• dump

Files per archive: 4,000,000,000

Files per file system: 4,000,000,000

File size:

File name size:

4 GB

No limit (part of the inode data)

• vdump

Files per archive: maximum files per fileset

Files per file system: file system dependent

File size:

File name size: file system dependent

1024 bytes (with prefix)

A–8 System Limits

• tar

Files per archive: No limit

Files per file system: No limit

File size:

File name size:

8 GB (4 TB with extended option)

1024 bytes (with prefix)

• pax

Files per archive: No limit

Files per file system: No limit

File size:

File name size:

8 GB (4 TB with extended option)

1024 bytes (with prefix)

System Limits A–9

Software Subset Information

This appendix provides the sizes of all Tru64 UNIX software subsets for full, update, and RIS installations.

B.1 Disk Space Required for Software Subsets

Table B-1, Table B-2, and Table B-3 show disk space as the number of 512byte blocks required in the root , /usr , and /var file systems to install each Tru64 UNIX software subset. The figures for each group of files within a subset have been rounded up to the next higher 512-byte increment; this means that the total space requirements listed are slightly greater than the space actually required.

To determine the subset size in megabytes (MB), divide the size in blocks by

2048.

For information on the contents of each subset, refer to the Installation

Guide. If you want to add optional subsets after you install Tru64 UNIX

Version 4.0F, use the df command to determine free disk space in blocks.

Table B-1: Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F Operating System, Volume 1

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F Operating System root /usr /var Total

OSFACCT440

OSFADVFS440

OSFADVFSBIN440

OSFADVFSBINOBJECT440

OSFAFM440

OSFATMBASE440

OSFATMBIN440

OSFATMBINCOM440

OSFATMBINOBJECT440

OSFBASE440

OSFBIN440

OSFBINCOM440

OSFBINOBJECT440

OSFC2SEC440

OSFCDAPGMR440

9.67

6745.80

2181.95

241.78

4574.03

1077.52

6982.87

3.06

3441.70

2160.73

799.84

21.40

423.57

— 16009.66

24438.53

82419.21

12819.52

1335.50

45.47

28843.91

— 19584.51

861.78

1360.56

— 3318.51

91.03

1178.22

— 13728.66

2185.00

3441.70

2160.73

1041.61

4595.44

423.57

— 16009.66

848.09

107705.84

— 14155.02

68.98

28958.36

— 19584.51

84.00

2306.34

— 3318.51

Table B-1: (continued)

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F Operating System root /usr /var Total

OSFCDEAPPS440

OSFCDEDEV440

OSFCDEDT440

OSFCDEMAIL440

OSFCDEMANOP440

OSFCDEMANOS440

OSFCDEMIN440

OSFCLINET440

OSFCMPLRS440

OSFCTABLOC440

OSFDCMT440

OSFDCMTEXT440

OSFDECW440

OSFDMS440

OSFDOSTOOLS440

OSFEMACS440

OSFENVMON440

OSFEURLOC440

OSFEXAMPLES440

OSFEXER440

OSFFONT15440

OSFFONT440

OSFHWBASE440

OSFHWBIN440

OSFHWBINCOM440

OSFHWBINOBJECT440

OSFIMXE440

OSFINCLUDE440

OSFINET440

OSFJAVA440

OSFJAVADEV440

OSFJAVADOC440

OSFKBDLK201440

OSFKBDLK401440

OSFKBDLK411440

OSFKBDLK421440

OSFKBDLK444440

OSFKBDPCXAL440

OSFKTOOLS440

OSFLAT440

OSFLDBBASE440

OSFLDBDOC440

OSFLDBGUI440

OSFLDBSRV440

— 11279.12

— 25497.76

— 53143.40

— 3370.60

2055.95

1425.27

— 13959.90

864.50

17363.30

— 25330.68

34.25

359.30

1107.81

4368.19

1781.22

87.26

— 1005.00

— 39543.50

21.25

23075.41

25718.38

152.62

1811.22

1995.58

4107.00

3160.99

2432.85

4266.22

2088.85

— 3470.83

— 22174.51

16.06

6685.81

5425.84

678.33

15188.52

— 21731.88

— 17695.53

— 33844.67

516.59

361.70

248.44

134.33

16.42

126.52

273.12

1486.21

923.71

— 13554.49

— 547.43

7666.76

83.00

— 11279.12

— 25497.76

— 53143.40

— 3370.60

2055.95

1425.27

76.00

14035.90

41.00

18268.80

— 25330.68

— 393.55

1107.81

4368.19

47.20

73.00

1828.42

160.26

— 1005.00

— 39543.50

173.87

1811.22

1995.58

4107.00

3160.99

2432.85

34.40

27376.03

— 27807.22

— 3470.83

— 22174.51

279.68

6981.55

5425.84

538.73

16405.58

— 21731.88

— 17695.53

— 33844.67

7125.71

7.82

361.70

248.44

134.33

16.42

126.52

273.12

8611.92

1448.12

— 13554.49

— 547.43

7666.76

83.00

B–2 Software Subset Information

Table B-1: (continued)

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F Operating System root /usr /var Total

OSFLEARN440

OSFLIBA440

OSFLSMBASE440

OSFLSMBIN440

OSFLSMBINCOM440

OSFLSMBINOBJECT440

OSFLSMX11440

OSFLVM440

OSFMANOP440

OSFMANOS440

OSFMANWOP440

OSFMANWOS440

OSFMH440

OSFMITFONT440

OSFMOTIF11440

OSFNETCONF440

OSFNETSCAPE440

OSFNFS440

OSFNFSCONF440

OSFOBSOLETE440

OSFOLDDECW440

OSFOLDX11440

OSFPGMR440

OSFPRINT440

OSFRCS440

OSFRIS440

OSFSCCS440

OSFSDE440

OSFSDECDE440

OSFSER3D440

OSFSER440

OSFSERPC440

OSFSERTC440

OSFSVID2440

OSFSYSMAN440

OSFTCLBASE440

OSFTERM440

OSFTKBASE440

OSFUUCP440

OSFX11440

OSFXADMIN440

OSFXC2SEC440

OSFXCDADEV440

OSFXDEMOS440

5377.42

542.96

3097.67

6555.07

3038.92

3.05

461.96

555.91

2267.79

2917.42

— 17037.07

— 14714.16

8872.17

1430.32

— 4416.17

— 18773.90

— 12847.09

— 2307.99

— 49357.37

50.21

1212.45

337.90

3375.14

— 14961.35

— 1410.37

112.77

9258.06

8822.86

1901.84

189.63

— 9976.66

— 14540.53

— 284.69

— 12130.00

— 12641.99

— 3963.00

31.59

678.00

615.95

27.68

14214.09

— 3415.12

3685.73

5433.76

101.73

11768.01

33.40

43990.18

7786.35

1272.02

523.15

1854.78

48.27

47.90

3097.67

6555.07

8464.60

546.01

461.96

555.91

2315.69

2917.42

— 17037.07

— 14714.16

8872.17

1430.32

— 4416.17

104.01

18877.91

— 12847.09

— 2307.99

— 49357.37

— 1262.67

337.90

3375.14

— 14961.35

— 1410.37

19.00

9258.06

8954.63

143.00

1901.84

332.63

— 9976.66

— 14540.53

— 284.69

— 12130.00

28.32

12670.32

— 3963.00

678.00

647.54

— 14241.77

— 3415.12

3685.73

5433.76

266.00

12135.74

698.13

44721.71

73.19

7859.54

1272.02

523.15

1854.78

Software Subset Information B–3

Table B-1: (continued)

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F Operating System root /usr /var Total

OSFXDEV440

OSFXEXAMPLES440

OSFXIEDOC440

OSFXINCLUDE440

OSFXLIBA440

OSFXMIT440

OSFXNEST440

OSFXOEM440

OSFXPRINT440

OSFXSYSMAN440

OSFXVFB440

2563.31

9228.08

1478.88

7638.01

— 15251.14

— 4177.32

390.00

0.00

— 336.42

— 13565.21

246.00

2563.31

9228.08

1478.88

7638.01

— 15251.14

— 4177.32

10.11

965.87

400.11

965.87

— 336.42

152.74

13717.95

10.11

256.11

Total 109121.05

934887.90

11882.30

1055891.24

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222 root /usr /var Total

109121.05

934887.90

11882.30

1055891.24

Table B-2: Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F Associated Products,

Volume 1

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Alternative Development Environment Tools for Tru64 UNIX root /usr /var Total

CMPDEVALT440

CMPDEVENH440

14.29

14210.74

12621.42

14225.03

12621.42

Total 14.29

26832.16

— 26846.45

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

DEC Ada Runtime Library for Tru64 UNIX root /usr /var Total

ADALIB404

Total —

1102.86

1102.86

1102.86

1102.86

B–4 Software Subset Information

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

DEC C++ Class Libraries Version 4.0 for Tru64 UNIX root /usr /var Total

CXLLIBA440

CXLSHRDA440

— 224.93

284.12

224.93

284.12

Total — 509.04

— 509.04

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Decimal RTL Version 2.4 for Tru64 UNIX root /usr /var Total

DCARTL250

O2ABASE250

— 2746.22

2648.56

2746.22

2648.56

Total — 5394.79

— 5394.79

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

DECevent root /usr /var Total

DIABASE290 61339.61

25.17

61382.03

Total 17.24

61339.61

25.17

61382.03

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

DEC Fortran RTL root /usr /var Total

DFARTL369 4959.12

— 4959.12

Total — 4959.12

— 4959.12

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

DEC Pascal RTL Version 5.4 for Tru64 UNIX Systems root /usr /var Total

DPORTL541 1890.15

— 1890.15

Total — 1890.15

— 1890.15

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Sort Runtime Library root /usr /var Total

SORLIB300

Total —

717.85

717.85

717.85

717.85

Software Subset Information B–5

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

INTERSOLV DataDirect root /usr /var Total

DAUDOC100

DAUJDBCODBC100

DAUODBCCON100

DAUSQLNKJAVA100

DAUSQLNKODBC100

DAUSQLNKSVR100

33.32

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

9546.46

496.95

10217.61

4738.95

5512.07

41441.10

9546.46

496.95

10217.61

4738.95

5545.39

41441.10

Total 33.32

— 71953.15

71986.47

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Free Software Foundation GNU Source for Tru64 UNIX root /usr /var Total

FSFEMACSSRC440

FSFGAWKSRC440

FSFGZIPSRC440

FSFINDENTSRC440

FSFMKISOFSSRC440

FSFRCSSRC440

55742.88

1220.38

1894.79

1244.68

975.94

1907.47

55742.88

1220.38

1894.79

1244.68

975.94

1907.47

Total — 62986.13

— 62986.13

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Multimedia Services Version 2.4D for Tru64 UNIX root /usr /var Total

MMEDRVAV201244

MMEDRVAV300244

MMEDRVAV3X1244

MMEDRVBBA244

MMEDRVMMSESS244

MMEDRVMSB244

MMEMANRT244

MMERELNOTES244

MMERT244

MMERTCDE244

MMERTSMPLDAT244

20.97

900.80

2240.32

1552.02

303.84

635.46

919.63

323.40

1401.76

21745.40

467.70

12385.79

11.82

900.80

2240.32

1552.02

303.84

635.46

919.63

323.40

1401.76

21778.19

467.70

12385.79

Total 20.97

42876.13

11.82

42908.92

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Netscape FastTrack Version 3.01 for Tru64 UNIX root /usr /var Total

WEBNETSCAPEFASTTRACK301 — 172955.13

— 172955.13

Total — 172955.13

— 172955.13

B–6 Software Subset Information

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F X Window System PanoramiX Extension ADK root /usr /var Total

PRXADK200 16459.98

— 16459.98

Total — 16459.98

— 16459.98

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Porting Assistant Version 3.0 for Tru64 UNIX root /usr /var Total

PRTBASE300

PRTMAN300

— 50631.13

18.45

50631.13

18.45

Total — 50649.58

— 50649.58

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Graphical Program Analysis Tools Version 2.0 for Tru64 UNIX root /usr /var Total

GPABASE206

GPAMVIEW206

GPAPROFHEAP206

GPAPVIEW206

38958.36

14481.00

21251.91

2226.05

38958.36

14481.00

21251.91

2226.05

Total — 76917.32

— 76917.32

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Worldwide Language Support Version 4.0F

root /usr /var Total

IOSAACMENU440

IOSCACDEAPPS440

IOSCACDEDEV440

IOSCACDEDT440

IOSCACDEMAIL440

IOSCACDEMIN440

IOSCADECW440

IOSCAX11440

IOSCAXDEV440

IOSCSCDEAPPS440

IOSCSCDEDEV440

IOSCSCDEDT440

IOSCSCDEMAIL440

IOSCSCDEMIN440

IOSCSDECW440

IOSCSOLDDECW440

IOSCSOLDX11440

IOSCSUCSBASE440

IOSCSX11440

IOSCSXDEV440

0.00

222.45

163.24

1038.04

84.04

4008.92

177.65

746.73

94.68

215.37

144.24

1067.61

78.31

495.43

750.62

3542.02

863.35

116.43

6559.27

94.57

222.45

163.24

1038.04

84.04

4008.92

177.65

746.73

94.68

215.37

144.24

1067.61

78.31

495.43

750.62

3542.02

863.35

116.43

6559.27

94.57

Software Subset Information B–7

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Worldwide Language Support Version 4.0F

root /usr /var Total

IOSDECDEAPPS440

IOSDECDEDEV440

IOSDECDEDT440

IOSDECDEHLP440

IOSDECDEMAIL440

IOSDECDEMIN440

IOSDECHX11440

IOSDEDECW440

IOSDEOLDDECW440

IOSDEOLDX11440

IOSDEX11440

IOSDEXDEV440

IOSELFONT100M440

IOSELFONT100P440

IOSELFONT75M440

IOSELFONT75P440

IOSELOLDDECW440

IOSELOLFONT440

IOSELUCSBASE440

IOSELX11440

IOSESCDEAPPS440

IOSESCDEDEV440

IOSESCDEDT440

IOSESCDEHLP440

IOSESCDEMAIL440

IOSESCDEMIN440

IOSESDECW440

IOSESOLDDECW440

IOSESOLDX11440

IOSESX11440

IOSESXDEV440

IOSFRBEX11440

IOSFRCAX11440

IOSFRCDEAPPS440

IOSFRCDEDEV440

IOSFRCDEDT440

IOSFRCDEHLP440

IOSFRCDEMAIL440

IOSFRCDEMIN440

IOSFRCHX11440

IOSFRDECW440

IOSFROLDDECW440

IOSFROLDX11440

IOSFRX11440

IOSFRXDEV440

IOSHUCDEAPPS440

545.88

2014.36

76.16

437.43

217.63

159.09

1022.86

22216.91

85.09

523.28

733.50

3597.96

886.37

6359.98

94.73

253.29

221.40

160.91

1011.98

18215.23

86.75

511.50

253.29

751.84

3548.00

877.02

6385.16

94.67

1111.38

1080.35

951.89

926.76

247.47

212.69

152.82

1020.63

18676.56

88.34

524.28

253.30

725.20

3568.04

870.65

6401.73

94.79

217.01

37.23

545.88

2051.59

76.16

437.43

217.63

159.09

1022.86

22216.91

85.09

523.28

733.50

3597.96

886.37

6359.98

94.73

253.29

221.40

160.91

1011.98

18215.23

86.75

511.50

253.29

751.84

3548.00

877.02

6385.16

94.67

1111.38

1080.35

951.89

926.76

247.47

212.69

152.82

1020.63

18676.56

88.34

524.28

253.30

725.20

3568.04

870.65

6401.73

94.79

217.01

B–8 Software Subset Information

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Worldwide Language Support Version 4.0F

root /usr /var Total

IOSHUCDEDEV440

IOSHUCDEDT440

IOSHUCDEMAIL440

IOSHUCDEMIN440

IOSHUDECW440

IOSHUOLDDECW440

IOSHUOLDX11440

IOSHUUCSBASE440

IOSHUX11440

IOSHUXDEV440

IOSITCDEAPPS440

IOSITCDEDEV440

IOSITCDEDT440

IOSITCDEHLP440

IOSITCDEMAIL440

IOSITCDEMIN440

IOSITDECW440

IOSITOLDDECW440

IOSITOLDX11440

IOSITX11440

IOSITXDEV440

IOSIWBASE440

IOSIWCDEDT440

IOSIWCDEMIN440

IOSIWDECW440

IOSIWFONT100M440

IOSIWFONT100P440

IOSIWFONT75M440

IOSIWFONT75P440

IOSIWOLDX11440

IOSIWOLFONT440

IOSIWUCSBASE440

IOSIWX11440

IOSIWXDEV440

IOSJPABASE440

IOSJPAMANOS440

IOSJPBASE440

IOSJPCDEAPPS440

IOSJPCDEDEV440

IOSJPCDEDT440

IOSJPCDEHLP440

IOSJPCDEHLPSJIS440

IOSJPCDEMAIL440

IOSJPCDEMIN440

IOSJPDECW440

IOSJPFONT100M440

550.85

728.54

3579.18

891.73

6438.24

94.73

186.07

242.71

154.81

84.12

632.91

2157.05

408.37

1901.38

11.77

3041.34

158.39

160.93

1056.37

80.75

4029.62

722.65

3567.26

855.98

100.43

6415.78

94.65

213.17

158.90

1009.87

14581.31

88.63

529.38

1704.15

930.67

3626.82

35.76

17054.78

475.68

1167.70

3742.31

32454.40

32817.55

307.84

1911.39

857.52

12069.76

62.44

6.10

728.54

3579.18

891.73

6438.24

94.73

186.07

242.71

154.81

84.12

632.91

2157.05

408.37

1901.38

11.77

3103.78

158.39

160.93

1056.37

80.75

4029.62

722.65

3567.26

855.98

100.43

6415.78

94.65

213.17

158.90

1009.87

14581.31

88.63

529.38

1704.15

930.67

3626.82

35.76

17611.72

475.68

1167.70

3742.31

32454.40

32817.55

307.84

1911.39

857.52

12069.76

Software Subset Information B–9

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Worldwide Language Support Version 4.0F

root /usr /var Total

IOSJPFONT100P440

IOSJPFONT75M440

IOSJPFONT75P440

IOSJPFONTM440

IOSJPLDBBASE440

IOSJPLDBGUI440

IOSJPMANOS440

IOSJPMANWOS440

IOSJPMSG440

IOSJPMSGSJIS440

IOSJPNEMACS440

IOSJPNEMACSSRC440

IOSJPNETSCAPE440

IOSJPOLDDECW440

IOSJPOLDX11440

IOSJPPGMR440

IOSJPUCSBASE440

IOSJPWNN440

IOSJPWNNPGMR440

IOSJPWNNSRC440

IOSJPX11440

IOSJPXDEV440

IOSKOBASE440

IOSKOCDEAPPS440

IOSKOCDEDEV440

IOSKOCDEDT440

IOSKOCDEHLP440

IOSKOCDEMAIL440

IOSKOCDEMIN440

IOSKODECW440

IOSKOFONTM440

IOSKOFONTP440

IOSKOOLDDECW440

IOSKOOLDX11440

IOSKOOLFONT440

IOSKOPGMR440

IOSKOUCSBASE440

IOSKOX11440

IOSKOXDEV440

IOSLTX11440

IOSPLCDEAPPS440

IOSPLCDEDEV440

IOSPLCDEDT440

IOSPLCDEMAIL440

IOSPLCDEMIN440

IOSPLDECW440

9.97

69.39

17159.06

20149.03

1213.74

10794.54

6576.92

126.00

1131.49

185.78

157.37

1339.99

11156.81

130.05

798.52

181.13

3826.33

9568.90

11912.50

8454.37

8310.46

13553.31

1121.06

3568.32

6815.61

184.39

1597.18

532.35

23417.63

10272.62

5967.04

5526.82

956.94

2046.36

1952.09

433.60

6159.31

168.60

6971.20

4679.19

97.87

198.84

199.49

159.54

1053.98

117.98

4038.94

740.93

95.00

76.00

3.07

17159.06

20254.00

1213.74

10794.54

6576.92

126.00

1131.49

185.78

157.37

1339.99

11156.81

130.05

798.52

181.13

3826.33

9568.90

11912.50

8454.37

8310.46

13553.31

1121.06

3568.32

6815.61

184.39

1597.18

532.35

23493.63

10272.62

5967.04

5526.82

1026.33

2046.36

1952.09

433.60

6162.38

168.60

6971.20

4679.19

97.87

198.84

199.49

159.54

1053.98

117.98

4038.94

740.93

B–10 Software Subset Information

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Worldwide Language Support Version 4.0F

root /usr /var Total

IOSPLOLDDECW440

IOSPLOLDX11440

IOSPLUCSBASE440

IOSPLX11440

IOSPLXDEV440

IOSRUDECW440

IOSRUOLDDECW440

IOSRUOLDX11440

IOSRUUCSBASE440

IOSRUX11440

IOSRUXDEV440

IOSSKCDEAPPS440

IOSSKCDEDEV440

IOSSKCDEDT440

IOSSKCDEMAIL440

IOSSKCDEMIN440

IOSSKDECW440

IOSSKOLDDECW440

IOSSKOLDX11440

IOSSKUCSBASE440

IOSSKX11440

IOSSKXDEV440

IOSSLX11440

IOSSVCDEAPPS440

IOSSVCDEDEV440

IOSSVCDEDT440

IOSSVCDEHLP440

IOSSVCDEMAIL440

IOSSVCDEMIN440

IOSSVDECW440

IOSSVOLDDECW440

IOSSVOLDX11440

IOSSVX11440

IOSSVXDEV440

IOSTHBASE440

IOSTHBIN440

IOSTHCDEAPPS440

IOSTHCDEDEV440

IOSTHCDEDT440

IOSTHCDEMAIL440

IOSTHCDEMIN440

IOSTHDECW440

IOSTHFONTM440

IOSTHOLDDECW440

IOSTHOLDX11440

IOSTHOLFONT440

442.48

710.03

3523.65

846.86

116.43

6045.19

94.58

209.76

215.22

154.46

979.67

12757.42

73.28

471.67

709.32

3361.60

835.55

3548.81

870.46

116.43

6654.71

94.69

733.34

3717.49

876.66

79.20

6501.25

94.85

207.22

261.99

1045.82

80.67

4022.92

6032.10

94.54

855.67

12.20

138.79

255.62

1125.16

67.13

489.06

172.56

134.48

1821.06

434.15

7385.15

123.70

6.10

710.03

3523.65

846.86

116.43

6045.19

94.58

209.76

215.22

154.46

979.67

12757.42

73.28

471.67

709.32

3361.60

835.55

3548.81

870.46

116.43

6654.71

94.69

733.34

3717.49

876.66

79.20

6501.25

94.85

207.22

261.99

1045.82

80.67

4022.92

6032.10

94.54

855.67

460.78

138.79

255.62

1125.16

67.13

489.06

172.56

134.48

1821.06

434.15

7508.85

Software Subset Information B–11

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Worldwide Language Support Version 4.0F

root /usr /var Total

IOSTHPGMR440

IOSTHPRINT440

IOSTHX11440

IOSTHXDEV440

IOSTRFONT100M440

IOSTRFONT100P440

IOSTRFONT75M440

IOSTRFONT75P440

IOSTROLDDECW440

IOSTROLFONT440

IOSTRUCSBASE440

IOSTRX11440

IOSULUCSBASE440

IOSWWBASE440

IOSWWBIN440

IOSWWBINCOM440

IOSWWCDEDT440

IOSWWFGC440

IOSWWFONTM440

IOSWWFONTP440

IOSWWLAT2FONT100M440

IOSWWLAT2FONT100P440

IOSWWLAT2FONT75M440

IOSWWLAT2FONT75P440

IOSWWLAT2OLFONT440

IOSWWLAT4FONT100M440

IOSWWLAT4FONT100P440

IOSWWLAT4FONT75M440

IOSWWLAT4FONT75P440

IOSWWLAT9FONT100M440

IOSWWLAT9FONT75M440

IOSWWLATCFONT100M440

IOSWWLATCFONT100P440

IOSWWLATCFONT75M440

IOSWWLATCFONT75P440

IOSWWLATCOLFONT440

IOSWWMOTIF11440

IOSWWMULE440

IOSWWMULESRC440

IOSWWPGMR440

IOSWWPHRASE440

IOSWWPRINT440

IOSWWSVEDEV440

IOSWWSYSMAN440

IOSWWUCSBASE440

IOSWWUDCOS440

18.42

911.24

11.46

389.12

38.18

402.66

304.19

1492.74

702.40

380.67

1195.91

4363.31

1022.86

3677.32

5576.47

1183.15

4386.89

1014.75

3699.16

5291.42

4470.69

1178.66

124.15

172.89

2724.44

107.32

1115.60

4113.84

962.49

3468.61

123.46

5458.68

76.16

502.37

73.08

1382.14

129.38

401.45

2424.95

1004.35

2030.64

3663.37

9837.15

98245.13

26977.74

320.78

853.19

1401.07

438.09

388.63

57217.66

2277.19

102.34

102.34

167.04

12.20

26.65

62.14

6.10

50.32

4.78

6.10

304.19

1492.74

702.40

380.67

1195.91

4363.31

1022.86

3677.32

5678.81

1183.15

4386.89

1014.75

3699.16

5291.42

4470.69

1178.66

124.15

172.89

2724.44

107.32

1115.60

4113.84

962.49

3468.61

123.46

5561.02

76.16

502.37

73.08

1567.61

1052.81

439.56

2424.95

1004.35

2030.64

3725.52

9837.15

98245.13

26977.74

320.78

1248.41

1489.57

438.09

393.41

57217.66

2685.95

B–12 Software Subset Information

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Worldwide Language Support Version 4.0F

root /usr /var Total

IOSWWUDCWOS440

IOSWWX11440

IOSWWXDEV440

IOSWWXFR440

IOSZHBASE440

IOSZHBIG5440

IOSZHCNBASE440

IOSZHCNCDEAPPS440

IOSZHCNCDEDEV440

IOSZHCNCDEDT440

IOSZHCNCDEHLP440

IOSZHCNCDEMAIL440

IOSZHCNCDEMIN440

IOSZHCNLOC440

IOSZHCNUCSBASE440

IOSZHCONV440

IOSZHEUCTW440

IOSZHHANYU440

IOSZHHANZI440

IOSZHHKBASE440

IOSZHHKUCSBASE440

IOSZHPGMR440

IOSZHSDECW440

IOSZHSFONTM440

IOSZHSFONTP440

IOSZHSOLDDECW440

IOSZHSOLDX11440

IOSZHSOLFONT440

IOSZHSX11440

IOSZHSXDEV440

IOSZHTDECW440

IOSZHTELEX440

IOSZHTFONTM440

IOSZHTFONTP440

IOSZHTOLDDECW440

IOSZHTOLDX11440

IOSZHTOLFONT440

IOSZHTWBASE440

IOSZHTWCDEAPPS440

IOSZHTWCDEDEV440

IOSZHTWCDEDT440

IOSZHTWCDEHLP440

IOSZHTWCDEMAIL440

IOSZHTWCDEMIN440

IOSZHTWLOC440

IOSZHTWUCSBASE440

151.03

13.81

168.16

82.06

814.20

683.05

766.41

2014.28

1565.14

2452.41

173.38

3379.82

27595.29

1871.93

425.72

15014.51

3081.71

198.22

520.60

2170.68

122.60

4741.92

2361.28

1170.21

440.94

1712.37

282.07

123.36

153.52

1088.91

18580.19

72.92

481.51

759.15

1860.69

275.66

9060.39

25532.25

5524.23

1284.83

28075.69

1889.00

367.62

455.72

3289.17

11978.26

196.19

1400.21

5487.71

4646.07

6.19

3.05

3.05

3.49

3.05

6.20

814.20

683.05

766.41

2014.28

1565.14

2452.41

173.38

3379.82

27595.29

1871.93

425.72

15020.70

3081.71

198.22

520.60

2324.76

122.60

4741.92

2361.28

1187.52

440.94

1883.58

282.07

123.36

153.52

1088.91

18580.19

72.92

481.51

759.15

1860.69

360.77

9060.39

25532.25

5524.23

1284.83

28081.89

1889.00

367.62

455.72

3289.17

11978.26

196.19

1400.21

5487.71

4646.07

Software Subset Information B–13

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Tru64 UNIX Worldwide Language Support Version 4.0F

root /usr /var Total

IOSZHTX11440

IOSZHTXDEV440

IOSZHUCSBASE440

IOSZHX11440

7630.42

942.60

22580.40

6499.00

7630.42

942.60

22580.40

6499.00

Total 3258.83

1088946.54

974.67

1093180.05

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222 root /usr /var Total

3344.65

1614536.39

72964.81

1690845.87

Table B-3: Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F Associated Products,

Volume 2

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Advanced File System Advanced Utilities root /usr /var Total

AFAADVANCED440

AFAADVDAEMON440

AFAADVGUI440

AFAADVMAN440

AFADEFRAGMENT440

AFAJPADVGUI440

AFAJPADVMAN440

10.87

47.43

Total 58.30

18443.88

76.00

18578.18

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Advanced Printing Software root /usr /var Total

APXADMIN100

APXBASE100

APXGUI100

APXGW100

APXSVR100

562.22

1709.69

14164.12

68.35

149.77

1696.68

93.04

4431.92

7154.91

14387.37

1078.09

2435.88

57.00

19.00

76.00

562.22

1777.56

14230.55

68.35

149.77

1696.68

93.04

4431.92

7230.91

14387.37

1078.09

2435.88

Total — 29488.16

76.00

29564.16

B–14 Software Subset Information

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Advanced Server Version 4.0A for UNIX root /usr /var Total

ASUADM401

ASUADMJP401

ASUBASE401

ASUMANJP401

ASUMANPAGE401

ASUTRAN401

10.80

27601.94

26249.39

36803.35

484.76

461.20

1782.24

1478.47

27601.94

26249.39

36814.16

484.76

461.20

3368.54

Total 118.63

93382.90

1478.47

94980.00

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

COMPAQ Analyze Version 1.0

root /usr /var Total

CABASE100

DESTA100

— 7243.55

30480.42

7243.55

30498.91

Total 18.49

37723.97

— 37742.46

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

NetWorker root /usr /var Total

BRXCLNT520

BRXMAN520

BRXNODE520

BRXSERV520

49804.47

2059.74

16840.00

29705.32

49804.47

2059.74

16840.00

29705.32

Total — 98409.53

— 98409.53

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

DEC Open3D Version 4.93

root /usr /var Total

O3DDWSBASE493

O3DDWSCMT493

O3DDWSCOMMON493

O3DDWSCONFIG493

O3DDWSGLBASE493

O3DDWSGLEXAM493

O3DDWSGLMAN493

O3DDWSMITPEX493

O3DDWSMITPEXEXAM493

O3DDWSMITPEXMAN493

O3DDWSPCM493

O3DDWSPEX493

O3DDWSPHRJP493

O3DDWSPHRMAN493

O3DDWSPHRTO493

— 7350.06

— 323.61

— 11091.24

0.00

4791.24

— 12469.16

— 3187.46

1701.22

0.00

2943.81

821.79

0.00

2660.46

— 36.28

— 21450.31

— 7350.06

— 323.61

6224.36

17315.61

4791.24

— 12469.16

— 3187.46

1701.22

2943.81

821.79

2660.46

— 36.28

— 21450.31

Software Subset Information B–15

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

DEC Open3D Version 4.93

root /usr /var Total

O3DDWSSTEREO493

O3DDWSSTEREOMAN493

O3DDWSZE3493

O3DDWSZLXE493

O3DDWSZLXL493

PMGRAPP440

PMGRBASE440

PMGRCLUSTERS440

PMGRGUI440

PMGRMAN440

PMGRUTIL440

180.08

12.92

— 25987.26

— 10833.82

— 16400.99

180.08

12.92

— 25987.26

— 10833.82

— 16400.99

Total — 122241.71

6224.36

128466.07

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Performance Manager for Tru64 UNIX root /usr /var Total

458.74

3973.18

948.57

26016.07

73.94

19.09

490.47

1803.09

458.74

3973.18

1439.04

26016.07

73.94

1822.18

Total — 31489.59

2293.55

33783.14

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

SCSI CAM Layered Components Version 3.1D

root /usr /var Total

CLCMC314

CLCOP314

14.63

3837.39

1935.17

3852.02

1952.11

Total 31.57

5772.56

— 5804.13

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

System V Environment root /usr /var Total

SVEADM425

SVEBCP425

SVEDEV425

SVEENV425

SVEMAN425

SVEPRINT425

Total

434.71

44.16

11.82

23.68

64831.23

22773.12

33915.49

19.16

7476.22

54327.97

528.38

183343.19

45.59

30.02

34.65

12.00

315.67

65311.53

22847.29

33961.95

54.84

7476.22

54657.66

437.93

184309.50

B–16 Software Subset Information

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

TruCluster

Software Version 1.6

root /usr /var Total

TCRASE160

TCRASEDT160

TCRCMS160

TCRCOMMON160

TCRCONF160

TCRDSVC160

TCRMAN160

TCRMCA160

91.93

58.04

21904.34

798.90

10836.30

1638.51

50.26

10648.21

1632.26

4411.52

3878.57

256.14

156.88

19.00

2313.41

25874.84

1055.04

10993.18

1715.54

50.26

12961.62

1632.26

4411.52

Total 149.96

51920.29

6624.01

58694.26

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

UniCensus root /usr /var Total

UNICEN301 0.00

1318.32

1318.32

Total — 0.00

1318.32

1318.32

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Visual Threads Version 1.0 for Tru64 UNIX root /usr /var Total

DVTBASE100 27616.55

905.33

699832.33

— 27616.55

Total — 27616.55

— 27616.55

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222 root /usr /var Total

18528.64

719266.30

B.2 Disk Space Required for Update Installations

For information about the disk space required to update the Tru64 UNIX operating system from Version 4.0D or Version 4.0E to Version 4.0F, see the

Tru64 UNIX Software Product Description.

B.3 Disk Space Required for RIS Areas

The Remote Installation Services (RIS) area for Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F

requires approximately 2.4 GB of disk space. The space requirements are broken down as follows:

Software Subset Information B–17

Table B-4: Disk Space Required for RIS Areas

2222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

512-Byte Blocks

Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0F Operating System

Alternative_Compiler

DEC_Ada_RTL

DEC_C++_RTL

DEC_Cobol_RTL

DEC_EVENT

DEC_Fortran_RTL

DEC_Pascal_RTL

DEC_Sort_RTL

Data_Direct

GNUSRC

Multimedia_Service

Netscape_FastTrack_Server

PanoramiX_ADK

Porting_Assistant

Program_Analyzers

Worldwide_Language_Support

AdvFS_Advanced_Utilities

Advanced_Printing

Advanced_Server

NetWorker

Open3d

Performance_Manager

SCSI_CAM_Layered_Components

System_V_Environment

TruCluster

Visual_Threads

15940

556

336

2304

16338

2420

818

376

65560

23878

35020

79172

9364

20144

24938

617330

9324

16684

60642

98894

69578

13750

3318

77246

26686

2417774

B–18 Software Subset Information

B.4 Disk Space Required for Documentation

The files for the Tru64 UNIX documentation set are contained on the

Documentation CD–ROM. The files for the worldwide support documentation are contained on the Associated Products CD–ROM in the

/mnt–pnt/Worldwide_Language_Support/doc directory. These files require the following amounts of disk space if moved from the

CD–ROM onto a local disk:

• Tru64 UNIX operating system documentation – 107 MB

• Worldwide support documentation – 6.5 MB

Software Subset Information B–19

A

Access Control List

See ACL

account manager, 4–8

ACL, 4–1, 4–2, 4–35

ACLs over NFS, 4–35

addvol, 8–7

Adobe DPS retirement, 8–2

Advanced Printing Software incorrect documentation, 7–2

AdvFS, 4–36

ACL, 4–35 addvol, 8–7 disk usage information, 4–36 du command, 4–36 failure of verify on dual-mounted domain,

4–38 migration to, 8–9 mkfdmn, 8–7 problem creating domains while running in lockmode 4, 4–38 reusing partitions, 4–36 verify utility, 4–37, A–5

AdvFS subsystem attribute, 1–5

Alpha VME 2100 master block, 3–14

AlphaPC 164 problems with installation procedure, 3–15

AlphaServer 1000 system

ECU configuration, 3–4 resolution restrictions, 3–5

AlphaServer 1200 system

RIS boot -fl n option, 3–3

AlphaServer 4000/4100 system

RIS boot -fl n option, 3–3

AlphaServer 8200/8400 firmware requirements, 3–5

AlphaServer 8200/8400 system

RIS boot -fl n option, 3–3

AlphaServer 1000A system

ECU configuration, 3–4

KZPSA PCI SCSI adapter, 3–2

AlphaServer 2100A system

KZPSA PCI SCSI adapter, 3–2

AlphaServer 1000A system resolution restrictions, 3–5

AlphaServer GS60/GS140 firmware requirements, 3–5

archiving and security, 4–2

assembler .rconst, 7–4

Associated Products CD-ROM mounting, 4–41 asynchronous hardware kits developing, 7–5

asynchronous I/O binary compatibility, 8–6

ATI Mach64, 3–2

ATM atmsetup replacement, 8–11

IP switching, 4–27 syslog messages, 4–27

atmsetup replacement, 8–11

atom, 1–4

audit_setup script, 8–14 awk command retirement of different versions, 8–12

AXPvme SBC firmware, 3–14 master block, 3–14

B

backup utilities’ limits, A–8

BCL, 8–7

BIND configuration, 4–13

bindsetup, 8–13

Block Change Logging

See BCL

bootable tape, 1–6

bootpd, 4–32

BSD namespace retirement, 8–7

C

cc command, 5–8

CDE, 6–1 network dependency, 4–28, 6–6 power management, 6–3 resolution, 6–3 screen savers, 6–3 xnlLanguage resource, 6–6

XOpenDisplay call, 6–6

CMA, 8–6

colormap, 6–2

COM applications, 1–8

COM for Tru64 UNIX, 1–8

Common Desktop Environment

See CDE

Common Object Model

See COM for Tru64 UNIX

Compaq Advanced Printing Software, 1–6

Compaq AlphaServer GS60 andGS140 restriction, 3–8

Compaq Analyze utility, 1–4

Compaq Insight Manager, 4–20 compiler oldc retirement, 8–4

core dumps, 4–5, 4–6, 4–8

cpio, 4–2 ctab locales

XPG3, 8–15

curses, 8–3

D dataless environment restrictions, 4–15

dbx, 1–4, 5–8, 8–4 debugging examining kernel crash dumps, 1–4, 5–8

DEC 7000 console error message, 3–15

DEC Ada retirement, 8–16

DEC C default language mode change, 8–4 default tunig problem, 5–2

DECnet mail sender address problem, 4–32

Index–2

DECthreads, 5–3 debugging, 5–7 memory alignment, 5–6 metering restricion, 5–6 object naming, 5–5 read-write locks, 5–5

SIGEV_THREAD notification mechanism,

5–7

DECwindows applications, 8–1 development enviroment atom, 1–4

device addressing limits, A–3

device limits, A–4

DHCP, 1–3

DHCP database migration, 4–32

Digital Versatile Disc, 1–8, 4–26 disk configuration problem with Alias Name field, 4–26

disk size, 8–11 disk space required for documentation files, B–19 required for update installation, B–17

RIS, B–17 total required for installation, B–1 disk usage information

AdvFS, 4–36

disktab, 4–35

DMCC, 3–11

DNS configuration interface, 4–13 documentation disk space required for, B–19

Domain Name Service

See DNS

dtmail, 6–4, 6–5 du command

AdvFS, 4–36

duplicate minor numbers, 4–34

DVD support, 1–8, 4–26

dxshutdown, 4–13 dxterm restrictions, 6–8

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

See DHCP

E

ECU, 4–15

AlphaServer 1000 system, 3–4

AlphaServer 1000A system, 3–4 eight-head graphics support for DMCC systems, 3–11

EISA Configuration Utility

See ECU

Emacs, 4–2, 4–3

enhanced security, 4–19 disaster recovery, 4–18

*_id_map files, 4–18

NIS issues, 4–17

/etc/hosts file, 4–28 extended UIDs enabling, 4–19

F

F_GETFL, 5–3

fcntl(), 5–3

Fibre Channel storage, 1–2

file manager, 6–4 file system limits maximum sizes, A–5 mounts, A–5

Index–3

file system limits (cont.) open files, A–7 file systems unmounting cleanly, 4–37 firmware

AXPvme SBC, 3–14

ftruncate(), 5–3

Futurebus backplane, 3–8

G

Gate Daemon Configuration Guide, 7–5

gr_id_map, 4–18

graph utility, 8–11

graphics controller, 3–2

H hardware upgrading, 3–1 help glossaries, 7–6 integration restrictions, 7–6 hiprof change to profiling of threaded programs,

5–8

I

IEEE POSIX standards, 8–6

inode-hash-size attribute, 7–5

Insight Manager, 4–20

installation, 2–1 to 2–2 alternate root, 4–16 disk space required, B–17 documentation disk space, B–19 new hardware options, 3–1 problems using console device ewe0, 2–2

installation (cont.) requirements, 8–11, A–1, B–1

RIS boot -fl n option, 3–3

RIS disk space, B–17 update, 2–1 to 2–2, 2–1, 7–7

installupdate, 2–1

installupdate -i retirement, 8–11

IP switching over ATM, 4–27 ipcs command change to format of output, 4–3

J

Java name space conflict with System V environment, 5–10

joind, 4–32

K

kernel subsystem attributes, 7–5 reference documentation, 7–5 keyboard

Japanese, 6–7

Personal Workstation 433au, 500au, 600au systems, 3–4 keyboard settings problems, 6–7

keymaps, 6–2

KZPSA PCI SCSI adapter

AlphaServer 1000A system, 3–2

AlphaServer 2100A system, 3–2

Index–4

L

lastlog, 8–4

LAT and NetRAIN, 4–31 tty, 4–34

latsetup, 4–34

libc, 8–16

libsecurity.a, 8–14

libsecurity.so, 8–14

llogin, 4–34

Local Area Transport

See LAT

logical partitions, 1–3 documentation updates, 7–2

Logical Storage Manager

See LSM

long double type, 8–5

lost startup messages, 4–24

lpstat command, 4–26

LSM, 4–38, 8–9

Block Change Logging (BCL), 8–7 boot failure, 4–40 dissociating LSM plex, 4–40 kernel rebuild required, 4–39 limits, A–4 rootvol, 4–40 using with SWXCR-E(A/B), 4–39 using with SWXCR-P(A/B), 4–39 volrootmir, 4–40 writing to block 0, 4–39

Lucida-Typewriter-medium-R-normal font

X11, 6–7

LVM-to-LSM migration, 8–9

M

MAILLOCKING, 6–4

mailsetup, 8–13

makepsres, 8–2

malloc, 5–1

memory limits, A–1 physical memory, A–1 virtual memory, A–1 memory requirements physical memory, A–1

Microsoft Sound Board driver, 8–10

Microsoft Windows NT clients and NetRAIN, 4–31

mkfdmn, 8–7

Modular Computing Components configuring eight-head support, 3–11

Motif

Version 1.1.3, 8–10

mount, 4–35

mule, 8–7

multiscreen environment, 6–1

N

nemacs, 8–7

NetRAIN, 4–29 and LAT, 4–31 and Microsoft Windows NT clients, 4–31 configuring, 4–30 failure of network services, 4–30 supported network adapters, 4–29

Netscape core dumps caused running from CDE, 4–5 core dumps if mailto: link is selected, 4–6 core dumps intermittently, 4–6 core dumps when multiple mail messages are deleted, 4–6

Index–5

Netscape (cont.) core dumps with Open3D, 4–8 exhausting colormap resources, 6–2 form handling problem under Asian locales,

4–8 problems deleting messages, 4–6 showps error, 4–7

netsetup, 4–28, 8–13 network

BIND configuration interface, 4–13

CDE, 4–28

network adapters, 4–33

Network File System

See NFS networking

ATM, 1–3

DHCP, 1–3

networking limits, A–7

newfs, 4–35

NFS

NFSv2, 4–35

nfssetup, 8–13

ntpsetup, 8–13

O

O_DSYNC, 5–3

O_TRUNC, 5–3

ogated routing daemon, 8–16 oldc C compiler retirement, 8–4

ONC RPC, 7–4

Open3D, 4–15

Oracle8 new tunable parameter, 4–3

P partitions reusing AdvFS, 4–36

password database format, 8–14

pax, 4–2

PCI, 3–2

PCI Presto Nvram hardware, 3–3

Personal Workstation 433au, 500au, 600au systems

EIDE (ATAPI) CD-ROM, 3–3 keyboard, 3–4 supported option cards, 3–4

PEX extensions retirement, 8–16

pixie profiler, 5–8

porting COM applications, 1–8

POSIX 1003.4a, 8–6

POSIX 1003.1b, 5–3

POSIX 1003.1c, 8–6

POSIX P1003.1C, 8–5

_POSIX_C_SOURCE, 5–2, 8–5

power management, 6–3 presto flush operations problems, 4–40

Prestoserve remote operations, 8–11 printing incorrect printcap entries for Advanced

Printing Software, 7–2 lpstat command, 4–26 using Compaq Advanced Printing Software,

1–6

process limits, A–2

profiling threaded programs, 5–8

proplist, 4–35

Index–6

pswrap, 8–2

pthreads, 5–3

CMA, 8–6 realtime, 5–4 retiring interfaces, 8–6 signal handling, 5–3 stackaddr thread creation attribute, 5–4 static libraries, 5–3

PVpci device support retirement, 8–12

pw_id_map, 4–18

Q

Qvision, 6–1

R

realtime, 5–2, 5–3 pthreads, 5–4

remote presto support, 8–11 remote print jobs problem disabling queue, 4–25 resolution restrictions

AlphaServer 1000 system, 3–5

AlphaServer 1000A system, 3–5

RIS boot -fl n option, 3–3 disk space required for, B–17

rootvol, 4–40

S

SA_SIGINFO, 5–2

SCSI device naming, 8–7 secsetup script retirement, 8–12

security, 4–2

security interfaces retiring, 8–15 sendmail new version, 4–3 problem sending to localhost, 4–5 updates to alias database, 4–4 warning message, 4–4 setld command problems, 4–8

setup scripts, 8–13 bindsetup, 8–13 mailsetup, 8–13 netsetup, 8–13 nfssetup, 8–13 ntpsetup, 8–13

showps, 8–2 signal handling pthreads, 5–3

software subset sizes, B–1

sound, 8–10

spooldir lock file, 4–25

startup messages, 4–24 static libraries pthreads, 5–3

struct utmp, utmpx, lastlog, 8–4

synchronized I/O, 5–3

syslog, 1–4

SysMan, 4–13 system administration syslog, 1–4

system attributes, 7–5 system management utilities retirement, 8–13

System V environment name space conflict with Java, 5–10 retirement, 8–16

Index–7

T

tar command, 4–2 problem with option, 4–5

TCP Timestamp and Selective

Acknowledgement Support, 4–33

texteroids, 8–2 threaded programs memory alignment issue, 5–6 profiling change, 5–8 tulip-style network devices installation problems, 2–2

TURBOChannel

3D graphics support retirement, 8–12

U

UFS, 4–35

ufs-blkpref-lookbehind attribute, 7–5

Universal Serial Bus, 1–7

update installation, 2–1 to 2–2, 7–7 disk space required for, B–17

upgrading hardware, 3–1

USB keyboards, 1–7

USB mice, 1–7

useradd, usermod, userdel, 4–19

utmp, utmpx, 8–4

V vdump killing, 4–37

VFS subsystem attribute, 1–5 virtual memory subsystem kernel

configuration, 8–14

Visual Threads, 1–6

volassist syntax, 8–8

volprint format, 8–9

volrootmir, 4–40

W

Worldwide Language Support kit installation, 7–1

wwinstallupdate script, 7–1

X

X11

Lucida-Typewriter-medium-R-normal font,

6–7

XIE

Version 3.0, 8–10 xnlLanguage resource

CDE, 6–6

XPG3 ctab locales, 8–15

Y

Year 2000 lmf, 4–14 test PAK, 4–14

Index–8

You can order documentation for the Tru64 UNIX operating system and related products on the following Web site: http://www.businesslink.digital.com/

If you need help deciding which documentation best meets your needs, see the Tru64 UNIX

Documentation Overview or call 800-344-4825 in the United States and Canada. In Puerto

Rico, call 787-781-0505. In other countries, contact your local Compaq subsidiary.

If you have access to Compaq’s intranet, you can place an order at the following Web site: http://asmorder.nqo.dec.com/

The following table provides the order numbers for the Tru64 UNIX operating system documentation kits. For additional information about ordering this and related documentation, see the Documentation Overview or contact Compaq.

22222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222222

Order Number

Tru64 UNIX Documentation CD-ROM

Tru64 UNIX Documentation Kit

End user Documentation Kit

Startup Documentation Kit

General user Documentation Kit

System and network Management Documentation Kit

Developer’s Documentation Kit

General Programming Documentation Kit

Windows Programming Documentation Kit

Reference Pages Documentation Kit

QA-MT4AA-G8

QA-MT4AA-GZ

QA-MT4AB-GZ

QA-MT4AC-GZ

QA-MT4AD-GZ

QA-MT4AE-GZ

QA-MT5AA-GZ

QA-MT5AB-GZ

QA-MT5AC-GZ

QA-MT4AG-GZ

QA-MT4AV-G8

Tru64 UNIX

Reader’s Comments

Release Notes for Version 4.0F

3333333333333333333333

DIGITAL welcomes your comments and suggestions on this manual. Your input will help us to write documentation that meets your needs. Please send your suggestions using one of the following methods:

• This postage-paid form

• Internet electronic mail: [email protected]

• Fax: (603) 881-0120, Attn: UBPG Publications, ZKO3-3/Y32

If you are not using this form, please be sure you include the name of the document, the page number, and the product name and version.

Please rate this manual:

Accuracy (software works as manual says)

Completeness (enough information)

Clarity (easy to understand)

Organization (structure of subject matter)

Figures (useful)

Examples (useful)

Index (ability to find topic)

Usability (ability to access information quickly)

Excellent

5

5

Good

5

5

5

Fair

5

5

5

Poor

5

5

Please list errors you have found in this manual:

Page Description

33333333 33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

33333333 33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

33333333 33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

33333333 33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

33333333 33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

Additional comments or suggestions to improve this manual:

33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

What version of the software described by this manual are you using?

3333333333333333

Name/Title

33333333333333333333333333333333333333333 Dept. 33333333333333333333

Company

3333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333 Date 33333333333

Mailing Address

333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

333333333333333333333333 Email 3333333333333333333333 Phone 33333333333333333

Do not cut or tear - fold here and tape

FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD MA

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

COMPAQ COMPUTER CORPORATION

UBPG PUBLICATIONS MANAGER

ZKO3 3/Y32

110 SPIT BROOK RD

NASHUA NH 03062 9987

Do not cut or tear - fold here and tape

NO POSTAGE

NECESSARY IF

MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement